Home › NISSAN › NISSAN 2022 Nissan Pathfinder Owner's Manual

NISSAN 2022 Nissan Pathfinder Owner's Manual

File info: application/pdf · 647 pages · 8.48MB

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

nissan, pathfinder, 2022, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, maintenance, service

nissan;, pathfinder;, 2022;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, maintenance;, service

Owners Manual - Dealer E Process

section in the 2022 Pathfinder Owner's Manual. Read carefully and keep in the vehicle. ... your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs.

Full PDF Document

If the inline viewer fails, it will open the original document in compatibility mode automatically. You can also open the file directly.

Extracted Text

2022 PATHFINDER
OWNER'S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the "15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/18 months", "90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/108 months" and "Additional information" sections of the "MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES" section in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section in the 2022 Pathfinder Owner's Manual.
Read carefully and keep in the vehicle.
Printing: March 2021 Publication No. SU22EA 0R53U0

15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ 18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Intelligent Key battery
Essential: � Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ 108 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace air cleaner filter (1) � Replace automatic transmission fluid (6) � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery � Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots

� Propeller shaft (4WD models)
� Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts
Essential:
� Replace brake fluid
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
(6) Performed based off the number of miles only.

Additional information
NOTE FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID: (1) Replacement interval is 90,000 miles (144,000 km)

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

FOREWORD

READ FIRST--THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state's lemon law.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
A NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!
� NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
� ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
� ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.
� ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat.
� ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
� ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

For descriptions specified for intelligent 4�wheel drive models, a 4x4 mark is placed at the beginning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. For additional information, see "Driving safety precautions" (P. 5-10).
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident.
For additional information, see "Onpavement and off-road driving precautions" (P. 5-8), "Avoiding collision and roll-over" (P. 5-9) and "Driving safety precautions" (P. 5-10).

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https:// owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. Refer to NISSAN CUSTOMER

CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner's Manual for contact information.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means "Do not do this" or "Do not let this happen."
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: "Perchlorate Material � special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/".
� 2021 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information:

tion at:

you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

� Your name, address, and telephone number
� Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the

For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003

For U.S. customers

driver's side)

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

� Date of purchase � Current odometer reading

or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

� Your NISSAN dealer's name � Your comments or questions
OR

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of

Illustrated table of contents

contents

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

1. Seat belt (3rd row outboard seat; driver's side shown; passenger side similar) (P. 1-80)
2. Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-9) 3. Seat belt (3rd row center seat) (P. 1-80)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

LII2683
4. Folding 2nd row bench (if so equipped) (P. 1-6)
5. Seat belt (2nd row center seat (if so equipped)) (P. 1-80)

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-61)
7. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-19) 8. Seat belts with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder height adjuster (driver's side shown; front passenger side similar) (P. 1-20, 1-61) 9. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-61) 10. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-78) Front passenger supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-78) 11. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) (P. 1-61) 12. Front central seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag (if so equipped) (P. 1-61) 13. Seats (P. 1-2) 14. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-61) 15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-36) 16. 2nd row seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-34) 17. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor (located on bottom of seatback) (P. 1-41) 18. 2nd row outboard seat belts with pretensioner(s) (P. 1-80) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

EXTERIOR FRONT

6. Door locks (P. 3-5) NISSAN Intelligent Key� system (P. 3-7) Keys (P. 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-33) Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-10) 8. Tire pressure (P. 8-29)
Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-37) 9. Front sonar sensors (if so equipped)
(P. 5-183) 10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-78) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (P. 2-82) 11. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-84) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

1. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-10)
2. Engine hood (P. 3-21)

LII2668
3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-73) 4. Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-12) 5. Power windows (P. 2-111)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

7. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-29) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-4)
8. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-7) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

1. Rear window wiper and washer switch (P. 2-77)
2. Liftgate release (P. 3-21) 3. Rearview camera (P. 4-3, 4-10)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents

4. Towing (P. 10-20) 5. Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-183) 6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

LII2669

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

7. Console box (P. 2-104) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

1. Glove box (P. 2-104) 2. Sun visors (P. 3-32) 3. Map lights (P. 2-117)

LII2670
4. Power moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-114)
5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-109) 6. Cup holders (P. 2-106)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-31) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-78)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)

Vehicle information display

(P. 2-22, 2-45)

6. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)

(P. 5-85)

ProPILOT Assist switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-86)

Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System*

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-73)

Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-76)

8. Center display*

Navigation system* (if so equipped)

9. Audio controls*

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-61)

11. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag (P. 1-78)

12. Glove box (P. 2-104)

13. Passenger heated seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-86)

Passenger climate-controlled seat

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-85)

14. Automatic heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-32)

LII2671 15. Heated steering wheel switch

3. Paddle shifter (P. 5-21) 4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-61)
Horn (P. 2-85)

(if so equipped) (P. 2-88) 16. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 17. Idling stop OFF switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-189)

18. Electronic parking brake (P. 5-23) Automatic brake hold switch (P. 5-25)
19. Power outlet (P. 2-96) 20. Driver heated seat switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-86) Driver climate-controlled seat switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-85) 21. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13) 22. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-78) 23. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel control (P. 3-30) 24. Hood release (P. 3-21) 25. Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-46) 26. Liftgate instrument panel switch (if so equipped) (P. 3-21) Steering Assist switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-90) Instrument brightness control switch (P. 2-83) Head Up Display (HUD) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-90) *: Refer to the separate NissanConnect� Owner's Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in parenthesis for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8. Battery (P. 8-14) 9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) 10. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) 11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

3.5L 6 Cylinder (VQ35DD engine model)
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 2. Drive belt location (P. 8-16) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)
0-8 Illustrated table of contents

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18) 6. Fuse box (P. 8-21) 7. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21)

LDI3596

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning/ Indicator light (red)
or

Name
Brake warning light

Page 2-13

Charge warning 2-14 light

Electric shift con- 2-14 trol system warn-
ing light (if so equipped)

Electronic parking 2-14

brake indicator

light (if so

equipped)

Warning/ Indicator light (red)

Name
Engine oil pressure warning light
(if so equipped)

Page 2-15

Master warning 2-15 light (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning 2-15 light and chime (if so equipped)

Steering Assist

2-15

Hands Off warn-

ing light (if so

equipped)

Supplemental air 2-16 bag warning light

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)
or

Name
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Page 2-16

Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)
Electric power steering warning
light

2-16 2-17

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)

Name
Electronic parking brake warning light (if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light

Page 2-17 2-17

Hill descent control system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light (if so
equipped)

2-17 2-18

Malfunction Indi- 2-19 cator Light (MIL) (if so equipped)

Warning/ Indicator
light (yellow)

Name
Master warning light (if so equipped)

Page 2-20

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
warning light (if so equipped)
Slip indicator light

2-20 2-20

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-20

Warning/ Indicator
light (other)

Name
Automatic brake hold indicator light (white/ green) (if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
High beam indicator light (blue) (if so equipped)

Page 2-21 2-21 2-21 2-21

Low beam indica- 2-21 tor light (green) (if so equipped)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warning/ Indicator
light (other)

Name
Side light and headlight indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights (green) (if so
equipped)

Page 2-21 2-21

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 2nd row seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 3rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Flexible seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16 Folding head restraint/headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Injured persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-51 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Precautions on SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Front, 2nd row outboard, and front central (if so equipped) seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems . . . . . . 1-76

Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78 Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and 2nd row outboard seats) . . . . . . . . . . 1-80

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . .1-81 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-81

SEATS

WARNING
� Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

ARS1152
� For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-20).
� After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

� Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
� To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
� Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
� The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

LRS3352

LRS3353

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-20). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

LRS3354
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Operating tips
� The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch.
� Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).

LRS3355
Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained.

1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3356
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

LRS3387
Power (Type A) (if so equipped)
Lumbar support (driver's seat)
The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver. Move the lever as shown (manual) or push the switch as shown (power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

LRS3357
Power (Type B) (if so equipped)

LRS3380
2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped)
2ND ROW SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar O1 up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position.

1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3381
2nd row bench seats (if so equipped)
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever
O2 and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever O2 up and lean your
body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-20). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

WARNING
� After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
� Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
� For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-20).

If the seat back is folded down, the one touch function will be disabled. To pitch the seat, you must return the seat back to the upright position.
Multi-mode
WARNING
When returning the seat to its original position, confirm that the seat and seatback are locked properly.

LRS3382
One touch walk-in function
The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the vehicle by using the seat release button
located at the base of the 2nd row seat OA .
The 3rd row occupant can exit their seat from inside the vehicle by using the secondary seat release button located on the
back of the 2nd row seat OB . If a child safety
seat is installed in the 2nd row seat, the 3rd row can be accessed without removing the child safety seat.

CAUTION
� Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or bump your head when operating the walk-in seat.
� Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped up.
� Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat to pinch, hit any part of your body or other people when operating the 2nd row seat. Make sure the seat path is clear of all objects before moving the seat.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, push the seat release button located at the base of the 2nd row seat. To exit the 3rd row from inside the vehicle, push the seat release button located on the back of the 2nd row seat. Activating this seat release switch will pitch the 2nd row seat forward so you will be able to slide the seat forward and backward.
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the 3rd row.
To return the seat to a locked position, push the upper seatback rearward until the seat is locked.
Child seat access mode
The 2nd row seat can be slid forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat without a child safety seat being removed.
To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, push the seat release button located at the base of the 2nd row seat. To exit the 3rd row from inside the vehicle, push the seat release button located on the back of the 2nd row seat. Activating this seat release button allows you to pitch and slide the seat forward and backward.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to the 3rd row seats.
To return the seat to a locked position, push the upper seatback rearward until the seat is locked.
WARNING
� Do not leave a child in the child safety seat when operating the child seat access mode.
� When returning the seat to its original position, confirm that the seat is locked properly.
CAUTION
� Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or bump your head when operating the walk-in seat.
� Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped up.
� Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat to pinch, hit any part of your body or other people when operating the 2nd row seat. Make sure the seat path is clear of all objects before moving the seat.

Exiting the 3rd row To exit the 3rd row from either seating position, push the seatback release button. This will release the seat, then slide the entire seat forward. . To return the seat to a locked position, push the upper seatback rearward until the seat and track are locked.
WARNING
When returning the seat to its original position, confirm that the seat is locked properly.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or bump your head when operating the walk-in seat.

1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-20). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

3RD ROW BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT

LRS3358

Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch located on the outside corner of each seatback. Lean back until the desired angle is obtained.
To bring the seatback forward again, pull up on the latch and pull the seatback upright until the desired angle is obtained.

LRS3383
2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped)
ARMRESTS
The 2nd row bench seat or the 2nd row captain's chairs come equipped with armrest(s). Pull the armrest down as shown.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

LRS2924
2nd row bench seats (if so equipped)
FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
� Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

� When folding the bench seat seatback down for maximum storage, make sure the seat base is in the latched position by rocking the seat base. If the seat base is not properly secured, cargo stored on top of a folded seatback may become projectile causing personal injury or vehicle damage.
� Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
� Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
� Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats.
� Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat.
� Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat.

� Head restraints/headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason.
� If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.
� When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
� Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION
� When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum cargo holding, be sure that the console does not contact the center console of the captain's seat (if so equipped) to avoid possible damage to the console.
� When folding or returning the seat(s) to the upright position, to avoid injury to yourself and others:
� Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat.
� Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat.

LRS3389
2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped)
Folding the 2nd row seats
To fold the 2nd row seats flat for maximum cargo hauling:
1. Make sure that the head restraints/ headrests are lowered or removed. To remove the head restraint/headrest, push and hold the lock knob while moving the head restraint/headrest in an upward direction. Store the head restraint/ headrest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle.

LRS3388
2nd row bench seats (if so equipped)
2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.
3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of the outboard seats to fold the seatbacks flat. The seatback will lock into place when in cargo mode to optimize the load floor.
4. To return the 2nd row seats to a seating position, lift up on the recline lever on the side of the outboard seats and push up on the seatback until it latches in place.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position:
1. Use the pull straps OC to raise each seat-
back. Pull back until the seatback latches into position. Make sure to properly raise each seatback to an upright and secured position.
2. Do not use the pull strap to return the head restraint/headrest to the upright position. Pull back on the head restraint/ headrest until it latches in the upright position.

LRS3359
Folding the 3rd row seats
To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo capacity:
1. Pull the strap OA to release the head
restraint/headrest forward.
2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat
belt hooks OD found on the sides of the
cargo area.
3. Pull up on the latch OB located in the
upper corner of each seatback and lower the seatback forward over the seat base.

WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal seating position, the head restraints/ headrests must be returned to the upright position to properly protect vehicle occupants.
CAUTION
� When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum cargo holding, be sure that the console does not contact the center console of the captain's seat (if so equipped) to avoid possible damage to the console.

WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/ headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalk, except for Genuine NISSAN accessories specifically tested for use with the vehicle's head restraint/headrest stalk. Do not remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

� If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS3360
Captain's chair (if so equipped) The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/headrests.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.
� Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.

LRS3361
Bench seats (if so equipped)
� The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
� Proper Adjustment: � For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest. � If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

LRS2300
Type A (if so equipped)
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

LRS3390
Type B (if so equipped)

LRS2299
Type A (if so equipped)
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3391
Type B (if so equipped)

LRS2302
Type A (if so equipped)
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.

LRS3392
Type B (if so equipped) 4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop-
erly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

LRS2303
Type A (if so equipped)
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the
notch (notches) O1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob O2 .
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS3393
Type B (if so equipped)

WRS0134
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2351
Type A (if so equipped) For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS3394
Type B (if so equipped)

Raise

LRS2305
Type A (if so equipped)

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

LRS3395
Type B (if so equipped)

LRS2306
Type A (if so equipped)
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS3396
Type B (if so equipped)

1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal seating position, the head restraint/ headrest must be returned to the upright position to properly protect vehicle occupants.

LRS2307
FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST
To fold the head restraint/headrest, pull the strap located on the rear of the head restraint/headrest.
If the head restraint/headrest has been folded, make sure that it is returned to the upright position.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knobs are engaged in the notches before riding in that designated seating position.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

SSS0136
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
� Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

SSS0134

SSS0016
WARNING
� The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

SSS0014
WARNING
� Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
� Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

� Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
� Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
� Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
� Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
� If the seat belt warning light glows continuously or chime continues while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

� Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
� All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND CHIME
Both the driver's and passenger's front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12).
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
� Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.
� Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
� For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

� Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS3352
Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, see "Seats" (P. 1-2).

1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS3355

LRS2674
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle
OA until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
� The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.
� If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips OB as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack OC . Be
sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions' three-point seat belts have two modes of operation: � Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) � Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-34).
The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-71).

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:
� Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle O1 . The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: � When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor � When the vehicle slows down rapidly

LRS2529
3rd row center seat belt
The 3rd row center seat belt has a connec-
tor tongue O1 and a seat belt tongue O2 .
Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt operation.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

SSS0241
WARNING
� Always fasten the connector tongue and the seat belt in the order shown.
� Always make sure both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint. Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached. This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop.
1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt When folding down the 3rd row seat, the center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position as follows:
1. Hold the connector tongue O1 so that
the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle. Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool
such as a key OA into the connector
buckle. 2. Insert the seat belt tongue into the re-
tractor base first O2 by inserting the seat
belt tongue into the uppermost hole of the retractor base. 3. Then secure the connector tongue into
the retractor base O3 by inserting the
connector tongue to the lower hole of the retractor base and pushing it into the clip.
LRS3397

WARNING
� Do not unfasten the 3rd row center seat belt connector except when folding down the 3rd row seat.
� When attaching the 3rd row center seat belt connector, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position and the 3rd row center seat belt connector is completely secured.
� If the 3rd row center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury may result in an accident or sudden stop.

Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt Always be sure the 3rd row center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are attached. Disconnect only when folding down the 3rd row seat. To connect the buckle: 1. Pull out the connector tongue from the
retractor base O1 .
2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the
retractor base O2 .
3. Pull the seat belt and secure the con-
nector buckle until it clicks O3 .
The 3rd row center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the 3rd row center seat belt connector buckle. To fasten the seat belt, see "Fastening the seat belts" (P. 1-24).
LRS3398
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

justment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

SSS0896
A Shoulder belt height adjust button
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, see "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P. 1-20).
To adjust, press the button OA and then
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the ad-

WARNING
� After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
� The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
� The shoulder belt should rest on the middle of the shoulder. It must not rest against the neck.
� Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted in any way.
� Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is secured by trying to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down after adjustment.

1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3379
3rd row shown; 2nd row similar
Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/ shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and are available for the:

� Driver and front passenger seating position
� 2nd and 3rd row seating position
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
� Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.
� Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
� Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
� To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
� If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
� Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

CHILD SAFETY

WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
� Rear-facing child restraints
� Forward-facing child restraints
� Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-34).
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-34).
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-34) and "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-61).

1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen.
A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on

or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be positioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt without the booster seat.
A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
� Are the child's back and hips against the vehicle seatback?
� Is the child able to sit without slouching?
� Do the child's knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?
� Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
� Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
� Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt. NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.
1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

ARS1098

WARNING
� Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

WRS0256
� The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
� Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.
� Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.
� NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see "Forwardfacing child restraint installation using the seat belts" (P. 1-51).
� Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
� Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.
� Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child

could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
� Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts, or other items.
� A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.
� Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
� Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
� When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
� A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.
� 2nd row one touch function should not be used when a child restraint is occupied.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, see "LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system" (P. 1-36).
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
� Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
� Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

� If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
� If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).
� If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
� Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LRS3363
LATCH system lower anchor locations captain's seats (if so equipped)
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint

1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3378
LATCH system lower anchor locations bench seat (if so equipped)
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only:
� 2nd row bench seats (if so equipped)
� 2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped)
� 3rd row driver's side seating position

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
� Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
� Do not secure a child restraint in the 2nd row center position and outboard position at the same time.
� Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

� Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

LRS3036
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

LRS3375
LATCH label locations 2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped)

LRS3376
LATCH label locations 2nd row bench outboard seats only (if so equipped)

1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3377
LATCH label locations 3rd row driver's seating position

LRS3372
LATCH in the center rear seating position
A 5th LATCH anchor can be found between the outboard LATCH anchor pairs. It is specifically designed to be used together with the inboard LATCH anchor on the driver's side, in order to install a Child Restraint System (CRS) in the rear center seating position.
These anchors utilize standard LATCH an-
chor spacing, OA of 11.02 in (280 mm).

WARNING
� Never attach two CRS attachments to the same LATCH anchor. This may overload the anchor in a collision, which could increase the risk of the occupant's serious injury or death.
� When installing the CRS in the center rear seating position with the inboard LATCH anchors, be careful to ensure any occupant or CRS in the outboard seating positions is properly restrained using the vehicle seat belt and there is no interference with the center CRS installation. If the outboard occupants cannot be properly restrained, consider using the vehicle seat belt to restrain the CRS in the center seating position, or moving the CRS to another position instead.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

� When installing the CRS in the center seating position, use the seat back recline feature to align the left and right sides of the seat back, creating one evenly reclined surface. Never install a CRS in the center seating position when one part of the seat back is further reclined than the other. This may create an unstable surface on which to install the CRS. Failure to evenly recline the seat backs before CRS installation could increase the risk of the occupant's serious injury or death. Remember to re-check that the CRS is properly installed any time the seats are reclined or adjusted.

LRS3373

LRS3374

NG (the seat back recline is not aligned)

1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor
WARNING
� Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
� Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

LRS3040
2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)
Top tether anchor point locations
1 Top tether strap
2 Anchor point
Anchor points are located in the following locations: � 2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) on
the seatback in the seating positions shown. � 2nd row captain's seat (if so equipped) on the seatback in the seating positions shown.

LRS3364
2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped) � 3rd row bench on the seatback in the
seating positions as shown.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LRS3365
3rd row bench seat
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see "Child safety" (P. 1-32) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-34) for all Warnings and Cautions before installing a child restraint.

1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

LRS2997
Rear-facing webbing-mounted � step 2

LRS2996
Rear-facing rigid-mounted � step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

LRS0673
Rear-facing � step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

LRS0674
Rear-facing � step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the

WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, see "Child safety" (P. 1-32) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-34) for all Warnings and Cautions before installing a child restraint.

1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0256
Rear-facing � step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WRS0761
Rear-facing � step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

LRS2395
Rear-facing � step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS2396
Rear-facing � step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0762
Rear-facing � step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2397
Rear-facing � step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see "Child safety" (P. 1-32) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-34) for all Warnings and Cautions before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

straint is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-12).
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS2995
Forward-facing webbing-mounted � step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-50).

LRS2994
Forward-facing rigid-mounted � step 2
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child re-

1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

LRS0671
Forward-facing � step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0697
Forward-facing � step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-49

LRS2553
2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)
Installing top tether strap
1 Top tether strap
2 Anchor point
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors.

LRS3364
2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped)
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, see "Head restraints/ headrests" (P. 1-12).
2. Position the top tether strap O1 over the
seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.

1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION (if so equipped)
1. Position the top tether strap O1 as
shown.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest does not contact the top tether strap.

3rd row bench seat
1 Top tether strap

LRS3365

2 Anchor point

3rd row bench seat

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors, as applicable.
1. Position the top tether strap O1 as
shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest does not contact the top tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) � step 1
For additional information, see "Child safety" (P. 1-32) and "Child restraints" (P. 1-34) for all Warnings and Cautions before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-12).

1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

WRS0680
Forward-facing � step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (2nd row installation only). For additional information, see "Installing top tether strap" (P. 1-50).

LRS2394
Forward-facing � step 4 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

LRS0668
Forward-facing � step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0681
Forward-facing � step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

WRS0698
Forward-facing � step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 8.

LRS0865
Forward-facing � step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-71). Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

LRS2553
2nd row bench seat (if so equipped)
Installing top tether strap
1 Top tether strap
2 Anchor point
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION (if so equipped)
1. Position the top tether strap O1 as
shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest does not contact the top tether strap.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.

1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3rd row bench seat
1 Top tether strap

LRS3365

2 Anchor point

3rd row bench seat

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt, as applicable.
1. Position the top tether strap O1 as
shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point O2 as shown.

BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases: � Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach. � Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm. � A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/ shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat B. High back booster seat

LRS2479

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation

LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
� Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
� Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

LRS0464
� Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat should be used.
� If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, see "Child safety" (P. 1-32), "Child restraints" (P. 1-34) and "Booster seats" (P. 1-57) for all Warnings and Cautions before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the 2nd row, 3rd row or in the front passenger seat:

1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0699
1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

LRS0454
Front passenger position

LRS0451
2nd row or 3rd row bench center seat position (if so equipped)

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

LRS0452
2nd row or 3rd row outboard position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/ headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, see "Head restraints/headrests" (P. 1-12).

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in "Three-point type seat belt with retractor" (P. 1-23).

LRS0865

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch

in the ON position. The front passenger

air bag status light

may or may not

illuminate, depending on the size of the

child and the type of booster seat being

used. For additional information, see

"Front passenger air bag and status

light" (P. 1-71).

1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
� Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
� Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
� 2nd row outboard seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag
� Front central seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped)
� Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
� Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag
� Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and 2nd row outboard seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
2nd row outboard seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the 2nd row outboard seat passengers in certain sideimpact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Front central seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (if so equipped)
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact and rollover collisions. In a side-impact, this air bag is designed to inflate during a vehicle impact from either side.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain

side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags
This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver's and front passenger's knees in certain collisions.
The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger and rear outboard seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-20).
The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WARNING
� The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents

WRS0031
� The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-71).

� The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.
� The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

� The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-71).
� Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

ARS1133

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

ARS1041
WARNING
� Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

ARS1042
WARNING
� Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Preteens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-64 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046
WARNING
� Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-34).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

WRS0431
WARNING
Front, front central and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags: � The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
1-66 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3119

WARNING
� The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front and rear seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

WRS0032
WARNING
� When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
� Do not use seat covers on the front or rear seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

SSS0162

SSS0159

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)

1. Supplemental front-impact modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

LRS3399
air bag

1-68 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Occupant classification system control unit
4. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
5. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) (driver's side shown; front passenger side similar)
6. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags
8. 2nd row outboard seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag modules
9. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators
10. Seat belt (3rd row center seat)
11. Seat belt (3rd row outboard seat; driver's side shown; passenger's side similar)
12. Satellite sensors (driver's side shown; passenger side similar)
13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (2nd row rear outboard seats)
14. Seat belt (2nd row center seat (if so equipped))

15. Front central seat-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bag (if so equipped)
16. Pressure sensors in door (driver's side shown; front passenger side similar)
17. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags
18. Crash zone sensor
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items. � Do not allow a passenger in the 2nd
row captain's chair or 2nd row bench seats to push or pull on the seatback pocket. � Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket. � Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback, such as a child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.

� Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
� Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
� If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information about installing and using child restraints, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-34).
� Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.
� If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

� Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.
� Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and occupation classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag and the front passenger supplemental knee air bag may be automatically turned off under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light"

(P. 1-71). One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-70 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0865
Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt, and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts, and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag (ON or OFF) are indicated by the front passenger air bag status light which is located on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

CONDITION

DESCRIPTION

Empty Nobody/Somebody
Adult

Empty front passenger seat
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small Adult in front passenger seat
Adult in the front passenger seat

PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS LIGHT ( )
ON (illuminated)
ON (illuminated)
OFF (dark)

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND FRONT PASSENGER SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG STATUS INHIBITED
INHIBITED
ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal operation and troubleshooting of this occupant classification sensor system,

see "Normal operation" (P. 1-73) and "Troubleshooting" (P. 1-74).

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and

the child's weight can be detected and cause the air bags to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Fail-

1-72 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P. 1-34).
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can

check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light

, located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will be illuminated (blinking or

steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

� Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket (if so equipped).

� Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.
� Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
� Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
� Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in "Seats" (P. 1-2). Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in "Seat belts" (P. 1-20). Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front passenger fasten their seat belt.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.
NOTE:
This vehicle's occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
� Occupant is a small adult -- the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag and front passenger supplemental knee air bag are suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
� Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
� A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
� A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
� Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
� An object placed under the front passenger seat.
� An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

1-74 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
� Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
� The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in "Child restraints" (P. 1-34).
� An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket (if so equipped).

� A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
� A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
� Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
� An object placed under the front passenger seat.
� An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions
WARNING
� Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
� Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
� No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

� Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
� Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
� Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75

� Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).
� No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

� It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
� A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

LRS3400
FRONT, 2ND ROW OUTBOARD, AND FRONT CENTRAL (if so equipped) SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front and rear seats. The front central air bag (if so equipped) is located in the inside of the seatback of the driver's seat. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails in all three rows.

1-76 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front and rear outboard occupants. Front central side air bag, along with the use of seat belts helps cushion the impact force on the head area of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver, front passenger, and 2nd row outboard occupants seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The front central side air bag and curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short period of time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
� Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
� Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-77

� No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
� Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems.
� Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
� It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
LRS3384
Driver's side
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG
The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the driver's and passenger's side. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.

1-78 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3385
Passenger's side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
� Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the driver's or passenger's seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.
� Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
� No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.
� Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.
� Tampering with the knee air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver or passenger knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-79

� It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.

SEAT BELT WITH PRETENSIONER(s) (front and 2nd row outboard seats)
WARNING
� The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
� If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

� It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.
� If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front and 2nd row outboard seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

1-80 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s') activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the
pretensioner system. For additional information, see "Supplemental air bag warning light" (P. 1-81). If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

WRS0885
1. SRS Air bag warning labels The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visor.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-81

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
� The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
� The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
� The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING
� Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
� The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

1-82 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

� If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-83

MEMO
1-84 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Warning/Indicator lights (red) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Warning/Indicator lights (other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Oil control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Changing the meter screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Oil control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Rain-sensing auto wiper system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75 Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Heated 2nd row seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . .2-88
Hill descent control switch (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-89
Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-90 How to use the HUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92 Driver Assistance/Navigation linking . . . . . . . . 2-92
Emergency call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . 2-93
Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 120v outlet (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
USB/iPod� charging ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Wireless charger (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98 Wireless charger indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99 Wireless charger operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101

Front-door pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101 Lower console storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104 Second row console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-104 Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106 Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108 Luggage hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111 Rear door sunshade (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-113
Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114 Automatic moonroof and sunshade . . . . . . . 2-114
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-117 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-117 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
HomeLink� Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Programming HomeLink� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119

Programming HomeLink� for Canadian customers and gate openers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121 Operating the HomeLink� Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121

Clearing the programmed information . . . . . 2-122 Reprogramming a single HomeLink� button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Vents (P. 4-31) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-78)
2-4 Instruments and controls

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)

Vehicle information display

(P. 2-22, 2-45)

6. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)

(P. 5-85)

ProPILOT Assist switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-86)

Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System*

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-73)

Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-76)

8. Center display*

Navigation system* (if so equipped)

9. Audio controls*

10. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-61)

11. Front passenger supplemental knee air

bag (P. 1-78)

12. Glove box (P. 2-104)

13. Passenger heated seat switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-86)

Passenger climate-controlled seat

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-85)

14. Automatic heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-32)

LII2671 15. Heated steering wheel switch

3. Paddle shifter (P. 5-21) 4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-61)
Horn (P. 2-85)

(if so equipped) (P. 2-88) 16. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 17. Idling stop OFF switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-189)

Instruments and controls 2-5

METERS AND GAUGES

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster (if so equipped) or the right side of the vehicle information display. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

1. Tachometer 2. Warning and indicator lights 3. Vehicle information display
Odometer Twin trip odometer
2-6 Instruments and controls

LIC4666
4. Speedometer 5. Fuel gauge 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

LIC2218
7 inch (18 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

LIC4667
12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B (if so equipped)

LIC4762
12.3 inch (31 cm) Type C (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

LIC4732
Odometer
The odometer O1 is displayed in the vehicle
information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

LIC2219
7 inch (18 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
the engine into the red zone O1 .

LIC4668
12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

2-8 Instruments and controls

LIC4761
12.3 inch (31 cm) Type C (if so equipped)

LIC3538
7 inch (18 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant tempera-
ture is within the normal range O1 when
the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC4669
12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-13).

Instruments and controls 2-9

LIC2222
7 inch (18 cm) Type A (if so equipped)
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning message shows in the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
2-10 Instruments and controls

LIC4670
12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B (if so equipped) Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).

The

indicates that the fuel-filler door

is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
� If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-19) or "Malfunction Indicator (MIL)" (P. 2-64).
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Displays the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven.
DTE display will change to "---" when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

NOTE:
� The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.
� If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.
� Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

Instruments and controls 2-11

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Warning/Indicator light (red)

Brake warning light

Charge warning light

Electric shift control system warning light (if so equipped)

Electronic parking brake indi-

cator light (if so equipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light (if so equipped)
Master warning light (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime (if so equipped)
Steering Assist Hands Off warning light (if so equipped)
2-12 Instruments and controls

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)

Electric power steering warning light

Electronic parking brake warning light (if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light

Hill descent control system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (if so equipped)

Warning/Indicator light (other)
Automatic brake hold indicator light (white/green) (if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
High beam indicator light (blue) (if so equipped)
Low beam indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Side light and headlight indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green) (if so equipped)

Warning/Indicator light (red)

Warning/Indicator light (yellow)

Warning/Indicator light (other)

Supplemental air bag warning light

Master warning light (if so equipped)

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:

or ,

or , , ,

If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Brake fluid" (P. 8-12).
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
� Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
2-14 Instruments and controls

� Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
� If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Electric shift control system warning light (if so equipped)
This light illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system. When the master warning light illuminates, the chime sounds and the following message is displayed in the vehicle information display: "When parked apply parking brake".
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the chime sounds continuously. Ensure the parking brake is applied
Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Electronic parking

brake indicator

light (if so

equipped)

This light illuminates when the electronic parking brake system is operating.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates. When the engine is started and the parking brake is released, the indicator light turns off.

If the parking brake is not released, the electronic parking brake indicator light remains illuminated. Ensure the electronic parking brake indicator light has turned off before driving.
If the electronic parking brake indicator light illuminates or flashes while the electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "Electronic parking brake (switch type)" (P. 5-24).
Engine oil pressure warning light (if so equipped)
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7 ).
CAUTION
� Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
� The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate oil level. The oil level should be checked using the dipstick. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7 ).
Master warning light (if so equipped)
When the ignition is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if a warning message appears in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

Seat belt warning light and chime (if so equipped)
The light and chime remind you to fasten the driver and front passenger seat belts.
The 2nd and 3rd row seats may also be equipped with a seat belt reminder.
For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-20).
Steering Assist Hands Off warning light (if so equipped)
When the Steering Assist is activated, it monitors the driver's steering wheel operation. If the steering wheel is not operated or the driver takes his/her hands off the steering wheel for a period of time, the warning light illuminates. If the driver does not operate the steering wheel after the warning light has been illuminated, an audible alert sounds and the warning flashes in the vehicle information display, followed by a quick brake application to request the driver to take control of the vehicle again. If the driver remains unresponsive, the vehicle will automatically turn on the hazard lights and slow to a complete stop.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, see "Steering Assist" (P. 5-118).
Supplemental air bag warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
� The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
� The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
� The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, see "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" (P. 1-61).
2-16 Instruments and controls

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yellow)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information, see "Brake system" (P. 5-175).
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136).

Electric power steering warning light
WARNING
� If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
� When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the electric power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the electric power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering is operational.
If the electric power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see "Power steering" (P. 5-174).
Electronic parking brake warning light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates and then turns off.
The electronic parking brake system warning light functions for the electronic parking brake system. If the warning light illuminates, it may indicate the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "Parking brake" (P. 5-23).

Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P. 1-72).
Hill descent control system ON indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on briefly and then turns off.
The light comes on when the hill descent control system is activated.
If the hill descent control switch is on and the indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.
If the indicator light does not come on when the hill descent switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-17

For additional information, see "Hill descent control switch" (P. 2-89) or "Hill descent control system" (P. 5-181).
Low tire pressure warning light (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning also appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) or (P. 6-3).
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) and "Tire pressure" (P. 8-29).
WARNING
� Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
� If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-18 Instruments and controls

� If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

� When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
� Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
� The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.
� If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.
� Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) (if so equipped)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
� MIL on steady -- An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
� MIL blinking -- An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
do not drive at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h).
avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
avoid steep uphill grades.
if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.
Instruments and controls 2-19

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Master warning light (if so equipped)
When the ignition is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if a warning message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
2-20 Instruments and controls

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the RAB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-129).
Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The

indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC system is disabled in the vehicle information display. This indicates the VDC system has been turned off.

Enable the VDC system in the vehicle information display or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-177).

The VDC OFF indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the

indicator light while

you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.
WARNING
The VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (other)
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
Automatic brake hold indicator light (white/green) (if so equipped)
The automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminates when the automatic brake hold system is on standby.
The automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates when the automatic brake hold system is operating.
For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).

Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, see "Fog light switch" (P. 2-84).
High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected and the engine running. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).
High beam indicator light (blue) (if so equipped)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

Low beam indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the switch is

turned to the

position. The headlights

will come on; and the front side, tail, num-

ber plate, and instrument lights remain on.

Side light and headlight indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlights are on (not including the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system or signature lights). If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the side light and headlight indicator light will illuminate when the headlights turn on. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green) (if so equipped)
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

Instruments and controls 2-21

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 7 INCH (18 cm) TYPE A (if so equipped)

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Key reminder chime (if so equipped)
A chime sounds if the driver's door is opened while the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC or OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle. Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off or to AUTO before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key� door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one of the following improper operations is found. � The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors. � The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� system" (P. 3-7).

LIC3224
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: � Vehicle settings � Indicators and warnings � Information/warning messages � Tire pressure information � Drive computer information � Cruise control system information � Driving Aids (if so equipped) � ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped) � NISSAN Intelligent Key� operation
information

2-22 Instruments and controls

� Audio information � Compass and navigation information
(if so equipped) � Shift position � Distance to empty � Odometer � Clock and outside temperature

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

LIC4672

The vehicle information display can be

navigated using the

but-

tons and scroll dial located on the steering

wheel.

, -- navigate through the items

in the vehicle information display.

2. Scroll dial -- Use the scroll dial to navigate through the items and change or select an item in the vehicle information display. The scroll dial allows up or down navigation and press to select.

3. Short cut menu button-- Press this button to open a shortcut menu.

-- go back to the previous menu

STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON position the screens that display in the vehicle information include: � Active system status (if so equipped) � Trip computer � Fuel economy � Distance to empty � Tire pressure information � Intelligent 4x4 (if so equipped) � Navigation (if so equipped) � Audio � Warnings
Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information on warnings and indicators see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-37).

To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see "Customize Display" (P. 2-34).

Instruments and controls 2-23

TRIP COMPUTER 2-24 Instruments and controls

1. Home
The Home mode shows the following information: � Vehicle speed

LIC4782
� Navigation (if so equipped) � Audio
The Home display will switch to the Audio display by pressing the OK button.

2. Speed and Average speed (if so equipped)
The Speed and Average speed mode shows the current vehicle speed and the average vehicle speed since the last reset. The Speed and Average speed mode has three modes of operation. You can switch between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial or will be reset automatically each time the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (if so equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically each time when refueling.
3. Drive Computer
Average fuel consumption:
The average fuel consumption shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Average speed:
The average speed shows the average vehicle speed since the last reset.
Trip odometer:
The trip odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since the last reset.
Elapsed time:
The elapsed time shows the time since the last reset.
The Drive computer mode has three modes of operation. You can switch between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial or will be reset automatically each time the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (if so equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically each time when refueling.

4. Fuel economy display
Current fuel consumption:
The Fuel economy display mode shows the current fuel consumption.
Average fuel consumption:
The Fuel economy display mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset.
The Fuel economy display mode has three modes of operation. You can switch between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial or will be reset automatically each time the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (if so equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically each time when refueling.

Instruments and controls 2-25

5. Eco Pedal Guide
When the ECO mode is selected, you can view ECO Pedal Guide function for improving fuel economy.
The ECO Pedal Guide mode has three modes of operation. You can switch between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial or will be reset automatically each time the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (if so equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically each time when refueling.
For additional information, see "ECO Mode" (P. 5-31).
6. Tire Pressures
The tire pressure mode shows the pressure of all four tires while the vehicle is driven.
With the "Tire Pres ECO advice" function ON, when the tire pressure is getting low, "Check Tire Pressures for Best Fuel Economy" or "Add air for Best Fuel Economy" appears. For

additional information, see "ECO Mode Setting" (P. 5-31) or "Tire Pres ECO advice" (P. 5-31).
When the "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning appears, the display can be switched to the tire pressure mode by pushing the scroll dial to reveal additional details on the displayed warning.
7. Intelligent 4x4 torque distribution display (if so equipped)
When the Intelligent 4x4 torque distribution display is selected, you can view the distribution ratio of the transmission torque to the front and rear wheels during driving.
8. Compass (if so equipped)
This display indicates the direction the vehicle is heading.
9. Navigation (if so equipped)
When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information.

9. Audio
The audio mode shows the status of audio information.
11. Driver Assistance
The Driver Assistance mode shows the operating condition for the following systems:
� Forward �� Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system �� Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
� Lane: �� Lane Departure Warning (LDW) �� Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
� Blind Spot: �� Blind Spot Warning (BSW) �� Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62), "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35), "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136), "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-149) or "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42).

2-26 Instruments and controls

12. ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped)
The ProPILOT Assist mode shows operating conditions for the following systems: � Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) � Steering Assist
The display will also be shown when the ProPILOT Assist is turned on. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).
13. Traffic Sign Recognition (if so equipped)
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed limit.
For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (P. 5-32).
14. Idling Stop System (if so equipped)
The Idling Stop System provides the driver with information about the amount of fuel saved while using the system.
For additional information, see "Idling Stop System" (P. 5-189).

OIL CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The oil control system can be accessed in the Maintenance portion of the vehicle information display settings.
Engine oil information informs the distance to oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km) between oil change intervals for the 3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DD engine model).

Display when ignition is ON Engine Oil Service due in xxx miles
Engine Oil Service due

Display timing
Remaining oil life is less than 940 miles (1500 km).
Remaining oil life is 0 miles (0 km).

Action Required
Plan to have your vehicle serviced.
Have your vehicle serviced within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

The oil change interval cannot be adjusted manually.

The distance to oil change interval is calculated depending on the driving conditions and set automatically by the oil control system. A reminder will be displayed when approaching the end of the service interval.

When the Factory Reset option is selected in the vehicle information display, the oil control system will also be reset to initial value. Please change the engine oil when Factory Reset is selected.

CAUTION

If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

Operating the vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.

To reset oil control system:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Push the

and

buttons located

on the steering wheel until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Mainte-

nance". Then, press the scroll dial.

3. Select the "Service" and press the scroll dial.

4. Press the scroll dial according to the reset instructions displayed at the bottom of the "Service" maintenance screen.

For additional information, see "Maintenance" (P. 2-58).

Instruments and controls 2-27

SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display:
� VDC Setting

� Driver Assistance � ECO Mode Setting � TPMS Setting � Clock � Vehicle Settings

� Maintenance � Customize Display � Unit/Language � Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped) � Factory Reset

VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

System

Menu item

Explanation
Allows the user to turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-177).

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids, parking aids and braking features. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Steering Assist
Lane Assist Warning
Intervention
Blind Spot Assist Warning

Explanation
Allows user to turn the Steering Assist of the ProPILOT Assist system on or off. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).
Displays available lane options.
Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35).
Allows user to turn Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42).
Displays available blind spot options.
Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49).

2-28 Instruments and controls

Menu item Intervention
Emergency Brake Front
Rear
Speed Limit Sign
Speed Adjust by Route Spd.Limit Assist Parking Aids
Moving Object
Auto Show Sonar Front Sonar Rear Sonar Sonar Distance Sonar Volume Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alertness
Timer Alert Low Temp. Alert

Explanation Allows user to turn the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62). Displays available emergency brake options. Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136) and "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-149). Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-129). Allows user to turn the Speed Limit Sign on or off. For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P. 5-32). Allows user to turn the speed adjust by route feature on or off. Allows user to turn the speed limit assist to OFF, Manual or Auto. Displays available parking aids. Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, see "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P. 4-26). Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-183). Allows user to turn the front sonar on or off. Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off. Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-75). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P. 5-165). Allows user to set the timer alert. Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.
Instruments and controls 2-29

ECO Mode Setting
The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ECO Customize
Cruise Control Idling stop
Air Conditioning ECO Drive Assist
ECO Indicator ECO Drive Report View History Tire Pres ECO advice

Explanation Displays available ECO mode settings. Allows user to turn the cruise control mode on or off. For additional information, see "Cruise Control" (P. 5-85). Allows user to turn the Idling Stop System (ISS) on or off. For additional information, see "Idling Stop System" (P. 5-189). Allows user to turn the Air Conditioning mode on or off. For additional information, see "ECO Customize" (P. 5-31). Displays available ECO information settings. Allows user to turn the ECO indicator on or off. Allows user to turn the ECO Drive Report on or off. Displays the history report for the vehicle. Allows user to turn the tire pressure ECO advice on or off.

TPMS Setting
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to view or change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Tire Pressure Unit

Explanation Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Clock
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Clock Mode Clock Format Daylight Saving Time Zone Set Clock Manually

Explanation Allows user to adjust the clock mode to Auto, Manual or Time Zone. Allows user to adjust the clock format to 24H or 12H. Allows user to turn on or off the daylight saving mode. Allows user to select a time zone. Allows user to set the clock manually.

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings menu allows the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Power Back Door Lighting
Welcome Headlight Auto Room Lamp Accent Lighting Light Sensitivity Light Off Delay Locking

Explanation Allows user to turn the power back door on or off. Displays the available lighting options. Allows user to turn the welcome headlight on or off. Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Allows user to adjust the accent lighting. Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off. Displays the available locking options.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Menu item Ext. Door Switch Selective Unlock
Auto Door Unlock Horn beeps on lock Wipers Speed Dependent Rain Sensor Reverse Link Driving Position Exit Seat Slide
Exit Steering Up
Rear Door Alert Horn & Alert Alert Only OFF

Explanation
Allows user to turn the exit door switch on or off.
Allows user to turn the selective unlock feature on or off. When this item is turned on (default), only the driver's door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. All the doors can be unlocked if the capacitive touch pad is pressed within 2 seconds of the door handle capacitive unlock feature. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Allows the user to set the auto door unlock to Shift to P, IGN OFF and OFF.
Allows the user to turn the horn beeps on lock feature on or off.
Displays the available wiper options.
Allows user to turn the speed dependent wipers on or off.
Allows user to turn the rain sensor wipers on or off.
Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off.
Displays the available driving position options.
When the exit seat slide is on the driver's seat will move backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and the driver's door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver's seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).
When the exit steering up feature is turned on, the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver's door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position. For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).
Displays the available Rear Door Alert options.
When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds.
When selected, only the alert is displayed.
When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

2-32 Instruments and controls

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, see "Changing wheels and tires" (P. 8-38). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Service Air Filter Tire
Other

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to reset the current interval. This should only be done after completing oil change maintenance.
Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.

Instruments and controls 2-33

Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Main Menu Selection
Home Blank Speed Drive Computer Fuel Economy ECO Pedal Guide TPMS Idling Stop 4x4�I Navigation Audio Driving Aids Cruise Speed Limit Sign Route Guidance Alerts Transition (Cruise) Welcome Effect Gauges Animation Operation guidance

Explanation Displays the available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the ECO Pedal guide screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the Idling stop screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the 4x4�I screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the navigation screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the audio controls screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the cruise control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the speed limit sign screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Displays the available route guidance settings. Allows user to turn the alerts on or off. Allows user to turn the transition (cruise) on or off. Displays the available welcome effect settings. Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off. Displays the available operation guidance settings.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Menu item Lights Wiper
Front Rear High Beam Assist Seat Memory Cruise Control

Explanation Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off. Displays the available wiper settings. Allows user to turn the front wiper guidance on or off. Allows user to turn the rear wiper guidance on or off. Allows user to turn the High Beam Assist on or off. Allows user to turn the seat memory on or off. Allows user to turn the cruise control on or off.

Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Mileage/Fuel Tire Pressure Temperature Language

Menu item

Explanation Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Allows user to select the temperature display units. Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped)
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Key-Linked Settings

Explanation
Allows user to turn the key-linked settings on or off. This setting is enabled individually by each key. When enabled, various settings in the vehicle information display and the driver position (if equipped) will return to the same settings as the last time the linked key was used. When disabled for a key, no settings will be automatically changed when that key is used. For additional information, see "Memory storage function" (P. 3-36).

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Factory Reset

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

2-36 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The following messages may appear in your vehicle information display.
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� battery discharge" (P. 5-15).
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.
For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� system" (P. 3-7).

I-Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this warning appears for a period of time and then turns off.
The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the warning appears while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the warning appears while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Key low battery
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-25).
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� system" (P. 3-7).
Brightness indicator
This indicator shows the brightness adjustment of the instrument panel. For additional information, see "Instrument brightness control" (P. 2-83).
Caution Steep slope
This warning appears, and a buzzer sounds when the automatic brake hold function is activated while the vehicle is on a steep hill. Depress the brake pedal. For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).
Chassis Control System Error See Owner's Manual
This warning appears if the chassis control module detects a malfunction in the chassis control system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see "Chassis Control" (P. 5-180).

Instruments and controls 2-37

Check Back Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-46).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-94).
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.
� Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Dismiss Message" to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time.

� Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Disable Alert" to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting "Dismiss Message" during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting "Disable Alert" turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-46).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-94).

Door/Liftgate Open
This warning appears when a door or the liftgate has been opened.
Drive Mode Selector indicators
When a driving mode is selected using the Drive Mode Selector, the selected mode indicator is displayed. � SAND (4WD models) � MUD/RUT (4WD models) � SNOW � AUTO (4WD models) � ECO � SPORT � STANDARD (2WD models) � TOW
For additional information, see "Drive Mode Selector" (P. 5-28).
Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).

2-38 Instruments and controls

Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Oil Pressure: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37�F (3�C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, see "Driver Assistance" (P. 2-28).

Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Windshield-washer fluid" (P. 8-12).
Parking Sensor Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-183).
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-14).
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-14).

Press Brake Pedal
This warning appears in the following situations:
� The driver tries to release the electronic parking brake manually without depressing the brake pedal.
� The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill and there is a possibility of moving backward, even if the electronic parking brake is applied.
� This warning appears if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold is activated.
Press brake to operate switch
This warning appears if the automatic brake hold switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic brake hold function is activated. Depress the brake pedal and push the switch to deactivate the automatic brake hold function.
For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).

Instruments and controls 2-39

Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift position is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) function.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
Push ignition to OFF
After the Push ignition to OFF warning appears, the warning will appear if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC position when the shift position is moved to the P (Park) position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position.
Rear seat belt reminder
This rear seat belt reminder appears after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
2-40 Instruments and controls

If any of the rear passenger seat belts are not fastened, the seat belt icon illuminates in red to show which seat belt is not fastened. When a rear passenger's seat belt has been securely fastened, the color of the corresponding seat belt icon will change. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 65 seconds.
After the initial reminder is turned off (by 65 second timer or dismissing the warning in vehicle information display) and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (15 km/h), if any rear seat belt is unfastened, the rear seat belt reminder will display. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 95 seconds.
After the initial reminder is turned off (by 65 second timer or dismissing the warning in vehicle information display) and the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (15 km/h), if any rear seat belt is unfastened, the rear seat belt reminder will display and a warning chime will sound every two seconds until the corresponding seat belt is fastened. The chime will automatically turn off after approximately 95 seconds. The rear seat belt reminder will be displayed until it is dismissed in the vehicle information display.

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see "Extended storage switch" (P. 2-100).
Steep Slope Apply foot brake
This warning appears, and sounds buzzer if the "Caution Steep slope" warning has appeared over about 3 minutes. Then the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released, and the vehicle may move or roll away unexpectedly. Apply the foot brake to stop the vehicle from moving.
For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).

Timer Alert -- Have a break?
This indicator appears when the set time is reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For additional information, see "Driver Assistance" (P. 2-28).
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).
TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.
When parked apply parking brake
This message appears when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
AWD Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) system is not functioning properly while the engine is running. Reduce vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. For additional information, see "Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4)" (P. 5-171).
AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle
This warning appears when the oil temperature of the powertrain parts will increase due to the difference in rotation between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough roads, through sand or mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle. If this warning is

displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. In these cases, the 4WD changes to 2WD to protect the powertrain parts. Then if the warning turns off, you can continue 4WD driving.
Tire Size Incorrect See Owner's Manual
This warning may appear if there is a large difference between the diameters of the front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes, brand, construction and tread patterns are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn. If you have any problems, please change tires or adjust to the correct tire pressure. Do not select the SNOW or SAND or MUD/RUT (if so equipped) mode with the Drive Mode Selector and do not drive fast. For additional information, see "Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4)" (P. 5-171).
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
Instruments and controls 2-41

For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136).
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW or I-BSI system is unavailable.
For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62).
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
When cruise control is activated, a green circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and canceled, the speed will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated.

Currently not available
This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is automatically canceled:
� When the VDC system is turned off
� The SNOW mode or the SAND or MUD/ RUT mode is selected (4WD models).
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and VDC system is off.)
Driver Attention Alert Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P. 5-165).
Driver Attention Alert-- Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.

Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor blocked See Owner's Manual
This message appears when the front radar sensor may be obstructed due to: � mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc. � inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
All forward driving aids are temporarily disabled until the system detects that the front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.
For additional information, see: � Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-136) � ProPILOT Assist (P. 5-86) � Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW) (P. 5-149)
Hands on detection warning
This warning appears when the Steering Assist system is engaged and the following condition(s) occur: � When not holding the steering wheel � When there is no steering wheel
operation

2-42 Instruments and controls

Hold onto the steering wheel immediately. When the steering operation is detected, the warning turns off and the Steering Assist function is automatically restored.
For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).
Idling Stop System
This indicator shows the Idling Stop System status.
For addition information, see "Idling Stop System" (P. 5-189).
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)/ Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)/ ProPILOT Assist indicator
This indicator shows when the I-LI, I-BSI or ProPILOT Assist system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42), "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62) or "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW system is unavailable.
For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35).
Malfunction: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly: � Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) � Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Malfunction warning
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) malfunction: � Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) � Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection � Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW)

If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Not Available Bad Weather indicator
This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist system is automatically canceled:
� When the wiper (HI) operates.
� When lane markers in the traveling lane cannot be correctly detected for a period of time due to such items as a snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy day or several unclear lane markers are present.
If you want to use the Steering Assist system again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again when lane markers are clearly visible.
Not Available Front Camera Obstructed indicator
This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist system is automatically canceled:

Instruments and controls 2-43

� The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.
� Strong light, such as sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles, enter the front camera.
Not Available Parking Brake On
This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system is engaged.
Under the following condition, the ProPILOT Assist system is automatically canceled: � The electronic parking brake is applied.
The above system cannot be used when the electronic parking is activated.
For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist (P. 5-86) and "Parking brake" (P. 5-23).
Not Available Poor Road Conditions
This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist system, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is automatically canceled: � When the VDC system operates
2-44 Instruments and controls

� When a wheel slips
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and VDC system is off.)
Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened
This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system is engaged.
Under the following condition, the ProPILOT Assist system is automatically canceled: � When the driver's seat belt is not fastened
The above system cannot be used when the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
Not Available System Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly. � ProPILOT � Blind Spot Warning (BSW) � Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) � Lane Departure Warning (LDW) � Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, see ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86), Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62), "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35) or "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42).
ProPILOT Assist indicators
These indicators show the ProPILOT Assist system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-129).
Speed Limit Sign indicator
This message may appear when the Traffic Sign Recognition system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P. 5-32).

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 12.3 INCH (31 cm) TYPE B (if so equipped)

Steering Assist Not Available Cannot Detect Lane indicator
This indicator may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged. The Steering Assist system is automatically canceled when the lane markers in the traveling lane cannot be correctly detected for a period of time due to such items as a snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy day or several unclear lane markers are present.
If you want to use the Steering Assist system again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again when lane markers are clearly visible.
Steering Assist status
This indicator appears when the Steering Assist system is engaged.
For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104�F (40�C). For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86), "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-120), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62).

Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49), "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62) or "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-75).
Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator shows when the following systems are engaged and have detected a vehicle:
� Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
� Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-149).

LIC4677
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as: � Vehicle settings � Indicators and warnings � Information/warning messages � Tire pressure information � Drive computer information � Cruise control system information � Driving Aids (if so equipped) � ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped) � NISSAN Intelligent Key� operation
information
Instruments and controls 2-45

� Audio information � Compass and navigation information
(if so equipped) � Shift position � Distance to empty � Odometer/twin trip odometer � Clock and outside temperature � Intelligent 4x4 (if so equipped)

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

LIC4672

The vehicle information display can be

navigated using the

but-

tons and scroll dial located on the steering

wheel.

, -- navigate through the items

in the vehicle information display.

2. Scroll dial -- Use the scroll dial to navigate through the items and change or select an item in the vehicle information display. The scroll dial allows up or down navigation and press to select.

3. Short cut menu button-- Press this button to open a shortcut menu.

-- go back to the previous menu

To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see "Customize Display" (P. 2-59).

2-46 Instruments and controls

TRIP COMPUTER

1. Home
The Home mode shows the following information: � Vehicle speed

LIC4782
� Navigation (if so equipped) � Audio The Home display will switch to the Audio display by pressing the OK button.
Instruments and controls 2-47

Trip odometer:
The trip odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since the last reset.
Elapsed time:
The elapsed time shows the time since the last reset.
The Drive computer mode has three modes of operation. You can switch between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial or will be reset automatically each time the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (if so equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically each time when refueling.
4. Fuel economy display
Current fuel consumption:
The Fuel economy display mode shows the current fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption:
The Fuel economy display mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset.
The Fuel economy display mode has three modes of operation. You can switch between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial.
Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial or will be reset automatically each time the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (if so equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically each time when refueling.
5. Eco Pedal Guide
When the ECO mode is selected, you can view ECO Pedal Guide function for improving fuel economy.
The ECO Pedal Guide mode has three modes of operation. You can switch between Manual Reset1, Manual Reset2 or Auto Refuel by pushing the scroll dial.
Manual Reset1 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial.

2-48 Instruments and controls

Manual Reset2 can be reset manually by using the scroll dial or will be reset automatically each time the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (if so equipped).
Auto Refuel will be reset automatically each time when refueling.
For additional information, see "ECO Mode" (P. 5-31).
6. Tire Pressures
The tire pressure mode shows the pressure of all four tires while the vehicle is driven.
With the "Tire Pres ECO advice" function ON, when the tire pressure is getting low, "Check Tire Pressures for Best Fuel Economy" or "Add air for Best Fuel Economy" appears. For additional information, see "ECO Mode Setting" (P. 5-31) or "Tire Pres ECO advice" (P. 5-31).
When the "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning appears, the display can be switched to the tire pressure mode by pushing the scroll dial to reveal additional details on the displayed warning.

7. Intelligent 4x4 torque distribution display (if so equipped)
When the Intelligent 4x4 torque distribution display is selected, you can view the distribution ratio of the transmission torque to the front and rear wheels during driving.
8. Compass (if so equipped)
This display indicates the direction the vehicle is heading.
9. Navigation (if so equipped)
When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information.
9. Audio
The audio mode shows the status of audio information.
11. Driver Assistance
The Driver Assistance mode shows the operating condition for the following systems: � Forward
�� Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system

�� Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
� Lane: �� Lane Departure Warning (LDW) �� Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
� Blind Spot: �� Blind Spot Warning (BSW) �� Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (IBSI) (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62), "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35), "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136), "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-149) or "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42).
12. ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped)
The ProPILOT Assist mode shows operating conditions for the following systems:
� Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
� Steering Assist
The display will also be shown when the ProPILOT Assist is turned on. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).

Instruments and controls 2-49

13. Traffic Sign Recognition (if so equipped)
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed limit.
For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (P. 5-32).
14. Idling Stop System (if so equipped)
The Idling Stop System provides the driver with information about the amount of fuel saved while using the system.
For additional information, see "Idling Stop System" (P. 5-189).

2-50 Instruments and controls

CHANGING THE METER SCREEN VIEW
1. Tachometer

LIC4678
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge 3. Personal display 4. Speedometer 5. Fuel gauge

For models with the full-screen display, the meter screen view can be changed to expand the vehicle information display.
To change the meter screen view:
1. Push the shortcut menu button OA on
the left side of the steering wheel. "Shortcut Menu" appears on the vehicle information display.
2. Select "Change Meter View" by rotating
the scroll dial OB and pushing it to
change the view.
OIL CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The oil control system can be accessed in the Maintenance portion of the vehicle information display settings.
Engine oil information informs the distance to oil change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 miles (16,000 km) between oil change intervals for the 3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DD engine model).

Display when ignition is ON Engine Oil Service due in xxx miles
Engine Oil Service due

Display timing
Remaining oil life is less than 940 miles (1500 km).
Remaining oil life is 0 miles (0 km).

Action Required
Plan to have your vehicle serviced.
Have your vehicle serviced within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

The oil change interval cannot be adjusted manually.

When the Factory Reset option is selected in the vehicle information display, the oil control system will also be reset to initial value. Please change the engine oil when Factory Reset is selected.

CAUTION

If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

Operating the vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.

To reset oil control system:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Push the

and

buttons located

on the steering wheel until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Mainte-

nance". Then, press the scroll dial.

3. Select the "Service" and press the scroll dial.

4. Press the scroll dial according to the reset instructions displayed at the bottom of the "Service" maintenance screen.

For additional information, see "Maintenance" (P. 2-58).

Instruments and controls 2-51

SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display: � VDC Setting � Driver Assistance

� Personal Display � Head--Up Display (if so equipped) � ECO Mode Setting � TPMS Setting � Clock

� Vehicle Settings � Maintenance � Customize Display � Unit/Language � Factory Reset

VDC Setting
The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

System

Menu item

Explanation
Allows the user to turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-177).

Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids, parking aids and braking features.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Steering Assist
Lane Assist Warning
Intervention

2-52 Instruments and controls

Menu item Blind Spot Assist
Warning
Intervention
Emergency Brake Front
Rear
Speed Limit Sign Speed Adjust by Route Spd.Limit Assist Parking Aids
Moving Object
Auto Show Sonar Front Sonar Rear Sonar Sonar Distance Sonar Volume Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Driver Alertness
Timer Alert Low Temp. Alert

Explanation Displays available blind spot options. Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62). Displays available emergency brake options. Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136) and "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-149). Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-129). Allows user to turn the Speed Limit Sign on or off. For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P. 5-32). Allows user to turn the speed adjust by route feature on or off. Allows user to turn the speed limit assist to OFF, Manual or Auto. Displays available parking aids. Allows user to turn the Moving Object Detection (MOD) on or off. For additional information, see "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P. 4-26). Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-183). Allows user to turn the front sonar on or off. Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off. Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short. Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low. Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, see "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-75). Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P. 5-165). Allows user to set the timer alert. Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.
Instruments and controls 2-53

Personal Display
The Personal Display menu allows the user to set various screens in the personal display area in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Blank Navigation Time to Destination Fuel Economy Trip Gear position Average speed

Explanation Allows user to select the blank screen. Allows user to select the navigation screen. Allows user to select the time to destination screen. Allows user to select the fuel economy screen. Allows user to select the trip screen. Allows user to select the gear position screen. Allows user to select the average speed screen.

Head-Up Display (if so equipped)
The Head--Up Display menu allows the user to control the Head--Up Display feature.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Brightness Height Rotation Contents selection
Navigation Driving Assist Speed Limit Sign Audio TEL/SMS Reset
2-54 Instruments and controls

Explanation Allows user to change the brightness. Allows user to change the height. Allows user to change the rotation. Displays the available content in the Head-Up Display. Allows user to turn the navigation on or off. Allows user to turn the driving assist on or off. Allows user to turn the speed limit sign on or off. Allows user to turn the audio on or off. Allows user to turn the TEL/SMS on or off. Allows user to reset the settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

ECO Mode Setting
The ECO mode setting menu allows the user to change the settings for the ECO mode.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item ECO Customize
Cruise Control Idling stop
Air Conditioning ECO Drive Assist
ECO Indicator ECO Drive Report View History Tire Pres ECO advice

TPMS Setting
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to view or change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Tire Pressure Unit

Explanation Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Instruments and controls 2-55

Clock
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Clock Mode Clock Format Daylight Saving Time Zone Set Clock Manually

Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings menu allows the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Power Back Door Lighting
Welcome Headlight Auto Room Lamp Accent Lighting Light Sensitivity Light Off Delay Locking

2-56 Instruments and controls

Explanation
Allows user to turn the exit door switch on or off.
Allows user to turn the selective unlock feature on or off. When this item is turned on (default), only the driver's door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. All the doors can be unlocked if the capacitive touch pad is pressed within 2 seconds of the door handle capacitive unlock feature. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Allows the user to set the auto door unlock to Shift to P, IGN OFF and OFF.
Allows the user to turn the horn beeps on lock feature on or off.
Displays the available wiper options.
Allows user to turn the speed dependent wipers on or off.
Allows user to turn the rain sensor on or off.
Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off.
Displays the available driving position options.
When the exit seat slide is on the driver's seat will move backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and the driver's door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the driver's seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).
When the exit steering up feature is turned on, the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the driver's door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position. For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).
Displays the available Rear Door Alert options.
When selected, the alert is displayed; and the horn sounds.
When selected, only the alert is displayed.
When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

Instruments and controls 2-57

Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Service Air Filter Tire
Other

Menu item

2-58 Instruments and controls

Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Menu item Main Menu Selection
Home Blank Drive Computer Fuel Economy TPMS 4x4�I Idling Stop Compass Navigation Speed Limit Sign Audio Driving Aids Cruise Route Guidance Alerts Transition (Cruise) Welcome Effect Gauges Animation Operation guidance Lights

Explanation Displays the available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the 4x4�I screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the Idling stop screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the compass screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the navigation screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the speed limit sign screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the audio controls screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the cruise control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Displays the available route guidance settings. Allows user to turn the alerts on or off. Allows user to turn the transition (cruise) on or off. Displays the available welcome effect settings. Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off. Displays the available operation guidance settings. Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-59

Menu item Wiper
Front Rear High Beam Assist Seat Memory Cruise Control

Explanation Displays the available wiper settings. Allows user to turn the front wiper guidance on or off. Allows user to turn the rear wiper guidance on or off. Allows user to turn the High Beam Assist on or off. Allows user to turn the seat memory on or off. Allows user to turn the cruise control on or off.

Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Mileage/Fuel Tire Pressure Temperature Language

Menu item

Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.

Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.

Factory Reset

Menu item

Explanation
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

2-60 Instruments and controls

For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� system" (P. 3-7).
Automatic brake hold indicator (white/green) The automatic brake hold indicator (white) appears when the automatic brake hold system is on standby. The automatic brake hold indicator (green) appears when the automatic brake hold system is operating. For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).
Brightness indicator This indicator shows the brightness adjustment of the instrument panel. For additional information, see "Instrument brightness control" (P. 2-83).
Caution Steep slope
This warning appears, and a buzzer sounds when the automatic brake hold function is activated while the vehicle is on a steep hill. Depress the brake pedal. For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).
Instruments and controls 2-61

Chassis Control System Error See Owner's Manual
This warning appears if the chassis control module detects a malfunction in the chassis control system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see "Chassis Control" (P. 5-180).
Check Back Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-46).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-94).

Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.
� Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Dismiss Message" to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message automatically turns off after a period of time.
� Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select "Disable Alert" to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
WARNING
Selecting "Dismiss Message" during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off. Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting "Disable Alert" turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.

NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver enables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "How to use the vehicle information display" (P. 2-46).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert" (P. 2-94).
Door/Liftgate Open
This warning appears when a door or the liftgate has been opened.
Drive Mode Selector indicators
When a driving mode is selected using the Drive Mode Selector, the selected mode indicator is displayed. � SAND (4WD models) � MUD/RUT (4WD models) � SNOW � AUTO (4WD models) � ECO � SPORT � STANDARD (2WD models) � TOW
For additional information, see "Drive Mode Selector" (P. 5-28).

2-62 Instruments and controls

Electric shift control system indicator
This indicator appears when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system. When the master warning indicator appears, the chime sounds and the following message is displayed in the vehicle information display: "When parked apply parking brake".
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the chime sounds continuously. Ensure the parking brake is applied
Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Front fog light indicator (green)
The front fog light indicator appears when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, see "Fog light switch" (P. 2-84).
Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).

High Beam Assist indicator (green)
This indicator appears when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected and the engine running. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).
High beam indicator (blue)
This blue indicator appears when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator also appears when the passing signal is activated.
Hill descent control system ON indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this indicator appears briefly and then turns off.
The indicator appears when the hill descent control system is activated.
If the hill descent control switch is on and the indicator blinks, the system is not engaged.

If the indicator does not appear when the hill descent switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see "Hill descent control switch" (P. 2-89) "Hill descent control system" (P. 5-181).
Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Oil Pressure: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display if low oil pressure is detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).

Instruments and controls 2-63

Low Outside Temperature This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37�F (3�C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, see "Driver Assistance" (P. 2-28).
Low tire pressure indicator
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. The low tire pressure indicator warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this indicator appears for about 1 second and turns off.
Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. For additional information, see "Windshield-washer fluid" (P. 8-12).
2-64 Instruments and controls

Malfunction Indicator (MIL)

If this indicator appears steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

indicator

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator appears steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, see "Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test" (P. 10-35).

Master warning indicator
When the ignition is in the ON position, the master warning indicator appears with various other warning messages.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with the system. For additional information, see "Front and rear sonar system" (P. 5-183).
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-14).
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, see "Push-button ignition switch positions" (P. 5-14).
Press Brake Pedal
This warning appears in the following situations: � The driver tries to release the electronic
parking brake manually without depressing the brake pedal.

� The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill and there is a possibility of moving backward, even if the electronic parking brake is applied.
� This warning appears if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold is activated.
Press brake to operate switch
This warning appears if the automatic brake hold switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic brake hold function is activated. Depress the brake pedal and push the switch to deactivate the automatic brake hold function.
For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).
Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift position is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) function.

This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.
Push ignition to OFF
After the Push ignition to OFF warning appears, the warning will appear if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC position when the shift position is moved to the P (Park) position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position.
Rear seat belt reminder
This rear seat belt reminder appears after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
If any of the rear passenger seat belts are not fastened, the seat belt icon illuminates in red to show which seat belt is not fastened. When a rear passenger's seat belt has been securely fastened, the color of the corresponding seat belt icon will change. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 65 seconds.

After the initial reminder is turned off (by 65 second timer or dismissing the warning in vehicle information display) and the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph (15 km/h), if any rear seat belt is unfastened, the rear seat belt reminder will display. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 95 seconds.
After the initial reminder is turned off (by 65 second timer or dismissing the warning in vehicle information display) and the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (15 km/h), if any rear seat belt is unfastened, the rear seat belt reminder will display and a warning chime will sound every two seconds until the corresponding seat belt is fastened. The chime will automatically turn off after approximately 95 seconds. The rear seat belt reminder will be displayed until it is dismissed in the vehicle information display.
Reminder: Turn OFF headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).
Instruments and controls 2-65

Seat belt indicator and chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten the driver and front passenger seat belts.
The 2nd and 3rd row seats may also be equipped with a seat belt indicator.
For additional information, see "Seat belts" (P. 1-20).
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, see "Extended storage switch" (P. 2-100).
Side light and headlight indicator (green)
The side indicator and headlight indicator appears when the side light or headlights are on (not including the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system or signature lights). If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the side indicator and headlight indicator will appear when the headlights turn on. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P. 2-78).
2-66 Instruments and controls

Steep Slope Apply foot brake
This warning appears, and sounds buzzer if the "Caution Steep slope" warning has appeared over about 3 minutes. Then the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released, and the vehicle may move or roll away unexpectedly. Apply the foot brake to stop the vehicle from moving.
For additional information, see "Automatic brake hold" (P. 5-25).
Timer Alert -- Have a break?
This indicator appears when the set time is reached. The time can be set up to six hours. For additional information, see "Driver Assistance" (P. 2-28).
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-

sures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).
TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Transmission Shift Position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.
Turn signal/hazard indicators (green)
The appropriate indicator flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.
Both indicators flash when the hazard switch is turned on.
When parked apply parking brake
This message appears when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system below 6 mph (10 km/h).

Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
AWD Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) system is not functioning properly while the engine is running. Reduce vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. For additional information, see "Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4)" (P. 5-171).
AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle
This warning appears when the oil temperature of the powertrain parts will increase due to the difference in rotation between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough roads, through sand or mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle. If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. In these cases, the 4WD changes to 2WD to protect the powertrain parts. Then if the warning turns off, you can continue 4WD driving.

Tire Size Incorrect See Owner's Manual
This warning may appear if there is a large difference between the diameters of the front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes, brand, construction and tread patterns are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn. If you have any problems, please change tires or adjust to the correct tire pressure. Do not select the SNOW or SAND or MUD/RUT (if so equipped) mode with the Drive Mode Selector and do not drive fast. For additional information, see "Intelligent 4x4 (I-4x4)" (P. 5-171).
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning indicator
This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
This warning appears when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.
If the warning appears when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, see "Automatic

Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136).
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
This indicator appears along, with an audible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136).
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW or I-BSI system is unavailable.
For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62).
Cruise control indicator
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
Instruments and controls 2-67

When cruise control is activated, a green circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and canceled, the speed will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated.
Currently not available
This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is automatically canceled: � When the VDC system is turned off � The SNOW mode or the SAND or MUD/
RUT mode is selected (4WD models).
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and VDC system is off.)
2-68 Instruments and controls

Driver Attention Alert Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not functioning properly. For additional information, see "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P. 5-165).
Driver Attention Alert-- Take a Break?
This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.
Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor blocked See Owner's Manual
This message appears when the front radar sensor may be obstructed due to:
� mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc.
� inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
All forward driving aids are temporarily disabled until the system detects that the front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.
For additional information, see:
� Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-136)
� ProPILOT Assist (P. 5-86)

� Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) (P. 5-149)
Hands on detection warning
This warning appears when the Steering Assist system is engaged and the following condition(s) occur: � When not holding the steering wheel � When there is no steering wheel
operation
Hold onto the steering wheel immediately. When the steering operation is detected, the warning turns off and the Steering Assist function is automatically restored.
For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)/ Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)/ ProPILOT Assist indicator
This indicator shows when the I-LI, I-BSI or ProPILOT Assist system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42), "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62) or "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).

Idling Stop System
This indicator shows the Idling Stop System status.
For addition information, see "Idling Stop System" (P. 5-189).
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW system is unavailable.
For additional information, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35).
Malfunction: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly: � Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) � Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Malfunction warning
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) malfunction:
� Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
� Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
� Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Not Available Bad Weather indicator
This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist system is automatically canceled:
� When the wiper (HI) operates.
� When lane markers in the traveling lane cannot be correctly detected for a period of time due to such items as a snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy day or several unclear lane markers are present.
If you want to use the Steering Assist system again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again when lane markers are clearly visible.

Not Available Front Camera Obstructed indicator This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged. Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist system is automatically canceled: � The camera area of the windshield is
fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc. � Strong light, such as sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles, enter the front camera. Not Available Parking Brake On This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system is engaged. Under the following condition, the ProPILOT Assist system is automatically canceled: � The electronic parking brake is applied. The above system cannot be used when the electronic parking is activated. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist (P. 5-86) and "Parking brake" (P. 5-23).
Instruments and controls 2-69

Not Available Poor Road Conditions
This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist system, Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is automatically canceled: � When the VDC system operates � When a wheel slips
The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and VDC system is off.)
Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened
This message may appear when the ProPILOT Assist system is engaged.
Under the following condition, the ProPILOT Assist system is automatically canceled: � When the driver's seat belt is not fastened
The above system cannot be used when the driver's seat belt is not fastened.

Not Available System Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly. � ProPILOT � Blind Spot Warning (BSW) � Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) � Lane Departure Warning (LDW) � Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, see ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86), Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62), "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35) or "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42).
ProPILOT Assist indicators
These indicators show the ProPILOT Assist system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, see "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P. 5-129).
Speed Limit Sign indicator
This message may appear when the Traffic Sign Recognition system is engaged.
For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P. 5-32).
Steering Assist Not Available Cannot Detect Lane indicator
This indicator may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged. The Steering Assist system is automatically canceled when the lane markers in the traveling lane cannot be correctly detected for a period of time due to such items as a snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy day or several unclear lane markers are present.
If you want to use the Steering Assist system again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist system and set it again when lane markers are clearly visible.

2-70 Instruments and controls

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Steering Assist status
This indicator appears when the Steering Assist system is engaged.
For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104�F (40�C). For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86), "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-120), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P. 5-35) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62).
Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P. 5-49), "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62) or "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P. 5-75).

Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator shows when the following systems are engaged and have detected a vehicle:
� Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
� Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
For additional information, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection" (P. 5-136) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P. 5-149).

LIC2930
Your vehicle has two types of security systems: � Vehicle security system � NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-71

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if so equipped). The system can be armed even if the windows and moonroof are open.
2. Remove the key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key, door capacitive touch pad (if so equipped) or power door lock switch.
4. Wait 30 seconds for the system to complete the pre-armed phase. If during the pre-armed phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm:
� Any door is unlocked with the key or door capacitive touch pad (if so equipped).
� The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
� Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and liftgate are locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
� The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.

� The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver's door by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key or placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
The alarm is activated by:
� opening a door without using the Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver's door or the liftgate by pressing the
button on the Intelligent Key or pushing the capacitive touch pad (if so equipped) on the driver's or passenger's door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.

2-72 Instruments and controls

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition reoccurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Type A (if so equipped)
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING

LIC4679

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

Instruments and controls 2-73

LIC4680
Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
� Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
� Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

� Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshieldwasher fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
� Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshieldwasher fluid concentrate and water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. After approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
1 Intermittent (INT) -- intermittent opera-
tion can be adjusted by turning the
knob toward OA (faster) or OB (slower).
Also, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed (if so equipped). (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
2 Low (LO) -- continuous low speed
operation
3 High (HI) -- continuous high speed
operation
Push the lever up O4 to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you O5 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
NOTE:
The Wiper with Speed feature and wiper guidance may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display-- 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

2-74 Instruments and controls

WARNING
Do not operate the windshield wiper while the wiper arm is pulled up. The wiper arm may be damaged.

LIC4681
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
� Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause an injury or may damage a wiper.

� The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.
� When the windshield glass is coated with water repellent, the speed of the rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of the rainfall is small.
� Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper system when you use a car wash.
� The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining.
� Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is recommended for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For additional information, see "Windshield wiper blades" (P. 8-19).

Instruments and controls 2-75

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,
place the lever in the AUTO position O1 . The
wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the rear
O2 (Low) or toward the front O3 (High).
� High -- High sensitive operation
� Low -- Low sensitive operation
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, rotate the lever to the OFF position, or rotate the lever to the low or high position.
The rain-sensing feature may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

REAR SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING

LIC4682

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION
� Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
� Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.
� Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshieldwasher fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
� Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshieldwasher fluid concentrate and water.

2-76 Instruments and controls

If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow, etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.
1 Intermittent (INT) -- intermittent opera-
tion (not adjustable)
2 Low (ON) -- continuous low speed
operation
Push the switch forward O3 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH
LIC4683
To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. The rear window defroster switch also activates the heated washer nozzles (if so equipped).

CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.
NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

Instruments and controls 2-77

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

LIC4684
Type A (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

2 Rotate the switch to the

position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

NOTE:

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC4685

The Lights mode guidance feature may be disabled. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC4686
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: � Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark. � Turn off all the lights when it is light. � Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

2-78 Instruments and controls

� Turn on the headlights if the windshield wipers make multiple continuous passes within approximately one minute of the first pass (if so equipped). The headlights remain on until the wipers are turned off for a short period of time.
NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity (if so equipped) and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
To turn on the autolight system:
� Place the headlight switch in the AUTO
position O1 .
� Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
� The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, place the

switch in the OFF,

, or

position.

The headlights will turn on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes.

LIC4687
Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top
side of the instrument panel O1 . The au-
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become discharged.

Instruments and controls 2-79

Follow me home lighting (if so equipped)
The follow me home feature allows you to provide lighting from the vehicle after the ignition switch has been placed in the OFF position. Pulling the headlight stalk toward you once will activate the headlights for approximately 30 seconds. After that period of time, it will automatically switch off. It is possible to pull the headlight stalk up to four times to increase the lighting period up to 2 minutes.
NOTE:
The follow me home feature can be canceled by placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

LIC4688

Headlight beam select

1 To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward while the low beams

are on. The high beam lights come on

and the

indicator light illuminates.

2 Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off. The low beams do not need to be on for this to function.

High Beam Assist
The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.
WARNING
� The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.
� The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually.
� During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).
� When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

2-80 Instruments and controls

� When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.
� When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
� When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.
� When driving on a road with many curves.
� When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.
� When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
� When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.
� When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc.

� The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.
� The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.
� The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
� When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
� When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.
� Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).
� The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

LIC4689

High Beam Assist operation

To activate the High Beam Assist system,

turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-

sition and push the switch as illustrated

with the engine running. The

High

Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will

illuminate while the headlights are turned

on.

If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-81

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the headlight uses the low beam.
To turn off the High Beam Assist system, push the switch again..

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in the

position, the headlights will

turn off after a period of time.

2-82 Instruments and controls

LIC4690
Ambient image sensor maintenance
The ambient image sensor OA for the High
Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
� Always keep the windshield clean.
� Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.
� Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminate at 100% intensity when

the engine is started and the parking brake

is released. The LED Daytime Running

Lights (DRL) operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF position. When you turn

the headlight switch to the

position

for full illumination, the LED lights switch

from LED DRL to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC4691
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
Press the "+" button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.
Press the "-" button to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.

LIC4692
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
1 Move the lever up or down to signal
the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
2 Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Instruments and controls 2-83

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

2-84 Instruments and controls

LIC4693

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the head-

light switch to the

position, then ro-

tate the fog light switch to the

position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position, the headlights

must be on, then rotate the fog light switch

to the

position.

To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light switch to the OFF position.

HORN

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

LIC4694
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

LIC4695
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the climate controlled seats if you or the occupants cannot monitor seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat. Use of the climate controlled seats by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION
� The battery could run down if the climate control seat is operated while the engine is not running.
� Do not use the climate control seat for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
� Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
� Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar objects. This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat.
� Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth
� When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
� If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-85

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

The climate controlled seats cool down the front seats by ventilating air into the seats. The climate control switch is located by the air conditioning controls.
The climate controlled seat can be operated as follows:
1. Start the engine.
2. Press the switch to adjust the desired intensity. The indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
3. When the vehicle's interior is cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to press the switch to turn off the climate controlled seats. The indicator light on the switch will turn off. The climate controlled seats will retain the current settings even if the engine is restarted.

LIC4696
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION
� The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
� Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
� Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
� Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
� Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
� When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
� If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-86 Instruments and controls

HEATED 2ND ROW SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch to turn it off. The heated seats will retain the current settings even if the engine is restarted.

WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
� The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
� Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
� Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
� Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

� Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
� When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
� If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-87

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped)
3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

LIC4697
The 2nd row outboard seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the rear of the front center console and can be operated independently of each other. 1. Start the engine.
2. Push the switch, as desired. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
2-88 Instruments and controls

LIC4698
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68�F (20�C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68�F (20�C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on (approximately 30 minutes).
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH (if so equipped)

NOTE:
� Once activated, your heated steering wheel will automatically turn on and off to maintain a temperature above 68�F (20�C).
� When the temperature of the steering wheel is above 122�F (50�C) and the heated steering wheel switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

� The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

LIC4699
WARNING
� Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep downhill grades. Always drive carefully when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.

CAUTION
When the hill descent control system operates continuously for a long time, the temperature of the brake pads may increase and the hill descent control system may be temporarily disabled (the indicator light will blink). If the indicator light does not come on continuously after blinking, stop using the system.
The hill descent control system is designed to reduce driver workload when going down steep hills. The hill descent control system helps to control vehicle speed so the driver can concentrate on steering the vehicle.
To activate the hill descent control system: � the vehicle speed must be under 15 mph
(25 km/h)
Instruments and controls 2-89

� the hill descent control system switch must be ON.
The hill descent control system ON indicator light will come on when the system is activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illuminate while the hill descent control system applies the brakes to control vehicle speed.
If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent control system begins to function again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
The hill descent control system ON indicator light blinks if the switch is on and all conditions for system activation are not met or if the system becomes disengaged for any reason.
To turn off the hill descent control system, push the switch to the OFF position.
For additional information, see "Hill descent control system ON indicator light" (P. 2-17) or "Hill descent control system" (P. 5-181).

STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped)
LIC4101
The Steering Assist switch is used to enable and disable the Steering Assist system that is activated using the settings menu of the vehicle information display. The Steering Assist system controls the steering system, when ProPILOT Assist is engaged, to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86) and "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42).

HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) (if so equipped)
LIC4700
WARNING � Failure to properly adjust the bright-
ness and position of the displayed image may interfere with the drivers ability to see through the windshield which could cause an accident leading to severe injury or death. � Do not use the head up display for extended periods of time as that can cause you to not see other vehicles, pedestrians or objects, which could cause an accident leading to severe injury or death.

2-90 Instruments and controls

The HUD can display one or more of the following features (if so equipped):
1 Navigation/Warning
2 Audio
3 TEL/SMS
4 Vehicle speed display
5 Traffic Sign Recognition
6 Driving Aids
NOTE: � Do not place any type of liquid on or
near the projector. Doing so may cause malfunction of the equipment.

LIC4780
NOTE:
� Do not touch any internal parts of the projector. Doing so may cause malfunction of the equipment.
� To prevent scratches to the projector glass, do not place any sharp objects on or near the projector opening.
� Do not place any objects on the instrument panel which may obstruct the display of the HUD.
� If you wear polarized sunglasses the display may be difficult to see. Increase the brightness of the HUD in the vehicle information display or remove your sunglasses.

� Depending on weather conditions (rain, snow, sunlight, etc.), the display may be difficult to see.
� For cleaning, use a soft clean cloth, dampened with water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or cause discoloration to the projector lens. Do not spray any liquid such as water on the projector lens. Spraying liquid may cause the system to malfunction.
� If the displayed image appears distorted, it is recommended that you have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer or qualified workshop.
� The HUD has a special windshield to allow the image to be displayed clearly. If your windshield needs replacing, this should be completed by a NISSAN dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-91

LIC3829
HOW TO USE THE HUD
To turn the HUD on, push the HUD switch. To turn the HUD off, push the switch again.
If the HUD is turned off, it will remain off even if the vehicle is restarted.
The following settings can be changed in the vehicle information display: � Brightness � Height � Rotation � Contents selection
�� Navigation �� Driving Assist
2-92 Instruments and controls

�� Speed Limit Sign �� Audio �� TEL/SMS � Reset
NOTE:
Emergency information may display even if the HUD is turned off.
This product includes the following software.
(1) Panasonic Corporation or software developed for Panasonic Corporation
(2) Third-party software licensed to Panasonic Corporation
(3) Open source software
Regarding (3) Open source software, it includes open source software (OSS), including various software to which license information applies.
Refer to the license web site at: http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/i02lln39.
DRIVER ASSISTANCE/NAVIGATION LINKING
The HUD will display driver assistance and navigation information.

The driver assistance display will show warning situations for the following systems: � Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection � Lane Departure Warning (LDW) � Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(IFCW) � Hands-free warning (for vehicles with
ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) � Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so
equipped)
The navigation system linking display will show the following items: � Intersection names � Arrows indicating turning direction � Distance to the next intersection
The Audio System linking display will show the following items: � Songs � Radio stations
The TEL/SMS linking display will show the following items: � Caller's name or phone number

EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped)

LIC4264
Display brightness
The brightness of the display may be controlled by the navigation system. The brightness will also be adjusted automatically according to the exterior ambient lighting brightness.
NOTE:
� The HUD has a built-in sensor O1 that
controls the brightness of the displayed image. If you block the sensor with an object, the display will darken, making it difficult to see.

The Emergency call (SOS) button is used in combination with a NissanConnect� Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an emergency.
The Emergency call button O1 is under a
cover. Press the cover once. The cover will drop down, exposing the Emergency call button.
Pressing the button O2 will (with a paid
subscription) reach a response specialist that will provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle's occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/ connect or call 855�426�6628.

LIC4702
WARNING
� Please note that the Automatic Collision Notification service and Emergency Call function cannot be used in the following conditions: � Emergency functions and services will not be available without a paid subscription to NissanConnect� Services. � The NissanConnect� Services network system is disabled.
Instruments and controls 2-93

REAR DOOR ALERT

� The vehicle moves outside the service area where the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is connected to the system.
� The vehicle is outside the area where the cellular network service is receivable.
� The vehicle is in a location with poor signal reception such as tunnels, underground parking garages, behind buildings or in mountainous areas.
� The line is busy. � The TCU (Telematics Control Unit)
or other systems of your vehicle are not working properly. � It may not be possible to make an emergency call depending on the severity of a collision and/or emergency.
� Park the vehicle in a safe location and set the parking brake before operating the Emergency Call (SOS) button.
� Only use this service in case of an emergency. There may be a penalty for inappropriate use of the service.

� Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Individuals who use a pacemaker should contact the device manufacturer regarding any possible effects before using the system.
� The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) antenna is installed in the upper central part of the instrument panel. An occupant should not get any closer to the antenna than specified by the pacemaker manufacturer. The radio waves from the TCU antenna may adversely affect the operation of the pacemaker while using the NissanConnect� Services.

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially disabled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display�7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display--12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
When the system is enabled:
� The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the driver door is closed and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-62).
� If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven within approximately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to activate.

2-94 Instruments and controls

When the Rear Door Alert system is activated:
� When the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information display with the options to "Dismiss Message" or "Disable Alert" if desired. � Select "Disable Alert" to temporarily disable for that stop. � No selection or `Dismiss Message" will keep the alert enabled for that stop.
� If the alert is enabled when a driver exits the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states "Check Back Seat For All Articles."
If "Horn & Alert" setting is selected: � An audible horn sound will occur after
a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert. � If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound. � If the liftgate is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the liftgate is closed.

NOTE:
If "Alert Only" setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound.
WARNING
� If the driver selects "Disable Alert", no audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status.
� There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, this may occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
� The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).

NOTE:
There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s).
For additional information, see "Rear Door Alert is activated" (P. 2-62).

Instruments and controls 2-95

POWER OUTLETS

Instrument Panel
12V OUTLETS

LIC4703

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The instrument panel power outlet is powered only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Cargo Area

LIC4705

CAUTION
� The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
� Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
� Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

� Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
� Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
� Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights, or rear window defroster is on.
� Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off.
� Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
� When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

2-96 Instruments and controls

USB/iPod� CHARGING PORTS

LIC4706
2nd Row
120V OUTLET (if so equipped)
CAUTION
� The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
� Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
� Do not use accessories that exceed a 120V, 150W power draw. Do not use double adaptors or more than one electrical accessory.

� Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
� Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.
� Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
� When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

LIC4707
1st row
There are USB/iPod� charging ports located in 1st row in the front media pocket below the climate controls, in the 2nd row on the back of the center console and in the 3rd row (if so equipped) by the cup holders. These ports will charge compatible devices.

Instruments and controls 2-97

WIRELESS CHARGER (if so equipped)

NOTE:

2nd row

LIC4708

Not all of the USB/iPod� charging ports will operate with the display screen. Only the USB connection ports located under the climate controls will allow operation of USB/iPod� devices through the audio system.

LIC4709
3rd row (if so equipped)
CAUTION
� Do not force a USB device into the connector. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side down into the connector may damage the connector. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the connector.
� Do not use a reversible USB cable. Using the reversible USB cable may damage the connector.

LIC4701
1. Indicator
2. Charging pad
The wireless charger is located on the front of the center console. Lay the smartphone on the pad of the wireless charger. Charging will start automatically. The smartphone will be charged continuously while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

2-98 Instruments and controls

WARNING
� Never put metallic materials between the wireless charger and a smartphone.
� Those who use a pacemaker or other medical equipment should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
� Never put cloth over the smartphone during charging process.
� Never charge a smartphone when it is wet.
� Never put metallic materials or small goods such as a cigarette lighter, Intelligent Key or memory drive.
CAUTION
� Do not put an RFID/NFC/credit card between the wireless charger and a smartphone. This could cause data corruption in the card.
� Do not use the wireless charger with dust accumulated or dirt on the pad.
� Do not hit the surface of the wireless charger.

� Do not spill liquid (water, drinks, etc.) on the charging pad.
� Do not use grease, oil or alcohol for cleaning charging pad.
WIRELESS CHARGER INDICATOR
The indicator ( 1 ) will illuminate in orange when the charging process is started.
When the charging has completed, the indicator illuminates in green.
If a malfunction occurs or the charging process has stopped, the indicator will blink in orange for 8 seconds then turn off.
WIRELESS CHARGER OPERATION
To use the wireless charger, it is necessary to seat the smartphone well within the charging pad. To maximize charging performance, ensure the smartphone is fully seated on the center of the charging pad
over the "Qi" logo OA . Because the location
of the power receiver may vary depending on the smartphone, you will need to try and find the area that suits your smartphone.
Because some smartphone cases or accessories may adversely affect charging, remove them before wireless charging. Turn off the vibration function of the smartphone before wireless charging.

NOTE:
� Only a Qi compatible smartphone can be used.
� The smartphone may be warmed during charging process and the charging may stop by the protection function of the wireless charger. This is not a malfunction. If this occurs, restart charging after the smartphone cooled down. The indicator will blink in orange then turn off.
� The wireless charging process may be stopped by the status of the smartphone (battery temperature, etc.).
� If a radio noise interference occurs during charging process, put the smartphone onto the center ("Qi" logo) position of the wireless charger.
� The wireless charging process will stop during process of searching the Intelligent Key.
� The wireless charging process will not be started when a USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable is connected to the smartphone. The indicator may illuminate in orange or blink if the smartphone is put on the wireless charger with a USB cable connected. However, charging is not performed.
Instruments and controls 2-99

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

� Depending on the type of the smartphone, the indicator may remain illuminated in orange even when the charging process has been completed.
FCC ID: BEJWC500MNM IC: 2703H-WC500MNM This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body.

ISED Compliance Statement This device complies with RSS-Gen of IC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by LG Vehicle Components Company, will void the user's authority to operate the equipment. ISED RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with ISED RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed to operate with a minimum distance of 15 cm between the radiator and the end-user's body and arms.

LIC4753
The extended storage switch is used when the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is located above the brake pedal underneath the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

2-100 Instruments and controls

STORAGE

Pulled position

LIC3266

Pushed position

LIC3268
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

LIC4710

Instruments and controls 2-101

LIC4711
LOWER CONSOLE STORAGE TRAY

LIC2618
SEATBACK POCKETS
There is one seatback pocket located on the back of the driver and passenger seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the driver's and/or front passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items:
� Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat or 2nd row to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest.
� Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

2-102 Instruments and controls

Front console
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING

LIC4712

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Passenger side

LIC4713

LIC2214
Rear armrest (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-103

LIC4714
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the mechanical key when locking or unlocking the glove box.
WARNING
Keep the glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

LIC4752
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console box, pull the lever up
O1 and raise the lid O2 .
To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

LIC4715
SECOND ROW CONSOLE (if so equipped)
The second row console is removable. In order to remove, locate the front panel opening at the front of the center console.

2-104 Instruments and controls

LIC4716
Remove the front panel of the center console.

LIC4717
Pull up on the lever and lift up to remove center console.

LIC4034
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver's view and to help prevent an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-105

CAUTION
� Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.
� Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

Front console
CUP HOLDERS

LIC4718

CAUTION
Do not recline the rear seatback when you use the cup holders on the rear armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot, they may scald the passengers.

2-106 Instruments and controls

Rear door

LIC4719

LIC4722
2nd row (if so equipped)

LIC2212
2nd row (if so equipped)

3rd row

LIC4720

CAUTION
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION
Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Instruments and controls 2-107

Bottle holder -- front

LIC4710

CAUTION
� Do not use the bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.
� Do not use the bottle holder for open liquid containers.

2-108 Instruments and controls

Bottle holder -- rear

LIC4723

LIC4724
CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN
To access the floor storage area pull up on the strap to lift the luggage board.

LIC4725

LIC4726
LUGGAGE HOOKS
When securing items using luggage hooks located on the upper side finisher do not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single hook.
The cargo hooks that are located closer to the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
The cargo hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING
� Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
� Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo.
� Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
� Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
� The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
� Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Instruments and controls 2-109

LIC4202
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
WARNING
� Always install the crossbars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicle's roof may cause vehicle damage.
� Roof rack cross bars should be evenly distributed.
� Do not exceed maximum roof rack crossbars load capacity and always distribute the load uniformly.
2-110 Instruments and controls

� Heavy loading of the crossbars has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers.
� Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
� Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the crossbars.
CAUTION
� Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you cannot comfortably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or a stool.
Do not apply any load directly to the roof
side rails OA . Crossbars OB must be in-
stalled before applying load/cargo/ luggage to the roof of the vehicle.
Genuine NISSAN accessory crossbars may be available through a NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.

The service load capacity for the roof side rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg.), however do not exceed the crossbars load capacity.
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and rear).
For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to: � F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-
cated on the driver's door pillar).
Installing Crossbars (if so equipped)
WARNING
� It is recommended that you have the roof rack crossbars installed by a NISSAN dealer.
� Protect the painted area on the vehicle roof under the crossbars by placing a piece of cloth under the cross bars to prevent scratch damage.
� Make sure the moonroof (if so equipped) is in the closed position during the installation process.

WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
� Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
� To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

LIC4727
1. Window lock button
2. Left rear passenger side switch
3. Driver's side switch
4. Power door lock/unlock switch
5. Front passenger side switch
6. Right rear passenger side switch
Driver's side power window switch
The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached.
Locking rear passengers' windows
When the window lock button is pushed (the indicator illuminates), the rear passengers' windows cannot be operated with the rear passengers' power window switch. The rear passengers' windows can only be operated with the main switch (driver side switches). To cancel the passenger's window lock, push the window lock button again.

Instruments and controls 2-111

LIC4728
Front passenger's power window switch
The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window partially, push the
switch down O1 lightly until the desired
window position is reached. To close the
window partially, pull the switch up O2 until
the desired window position is reached.

LIC4729
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold
it down O1 . To close the window, pull the switch up O2 .

LIC4730
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.

2-112 Instruments and controls

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. If this occurs, please contact the dealer to re-initialize the power window auto-reverse system.
If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation, as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

When power window switch does not operate
If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.
If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC4169
REAR DOOR SUNSHADE (if so equipped)
The rear door sunshade is located within the rear doors at the base of the window.
� To raise the sunshade, pull up the center
tab O1 .
� Hook the sunshade slots onto the tabs extending from the top of the window
frame O2 .

Instruments and controls 2-113

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)

CAUTION
� Do not release the rear door sunshade during operation. This could damage the sunshade or cause injury.
� Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Doing so may elongate the sunshade. This could cause improper operation or could damage the sunshade.
� Do not place objects on or near the rear sunshade. This could cause improper operation or could damage the sunshade.
NOTE: To avoid damage to the sunshade, please note the following: � Do not pull or push the sunshade, other
than upwards. � Do not pull or push the sunshade with
the sunshade hung on the hooks. � Do not allow liquids or objects on the
storing area of the sunshade.
2-114 Instruments and controls

WARNING
� In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
� Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
� Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening.
� Do not place any heavy object on the moonroof or surrounding area.

LIC4759
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF AND SUNSHADE
Sliding sunshade and moonroof
When the sunshade switch is pushed to
the OPEN position O1 , the sunshade open.
(If the sunshade starts to open from the position between close and half open, the sunshade will stop half. When the switch is pushed again, the sunshade will open fully.) When the moonroof switch is pushed to
the OPEN position O3 , the moonroof opens
to the comfort mode position. (If the sunshade is close, the sunshade will open half

first. When the switch is pushed again, the moonroof will open fully.)
When the moonroof switch is pushed to
the CLOSE position O4 , the moonroof will
automatically close. When the sunshade
switch is pushed to the CLOSE position O2 ,
the sunshade will close. (If the sunshade starts to close from the position between full and half open, the sunshade will stop half. When the switch is pushed again, the sunshade will close fully. However, if the moonroof is open or tilted up, the sunshade will not close beyond half.)
To stop the sunshade or moonroof during the operation, push the moonroof switch
to either of the OPEN O1 , O3 , CLOSE O2 , O4 or UP O5 position.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up the moonroof, push the moonroof
switch to the UP position O5 . To tilt down
the moonroof, push the switch to the
CLOSE position O4 .
Comfort mode
This is the position used when driving with the moonroof open. When driving with the moonroof fully open, wind noise may be very loud. Use the comfort mode position when driving.

Auto-reverse function
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof and sunshade.
The auto-reverse function enables the moonroof and sunshade to automatically reverse when something is caught in the moonroof and sunshade as it is closing. When the control unit detects an obstacle, the moonroof and sunshade will open immediately.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may activate if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof and sunshade occurs.
If the auto-reverse function activates consecutively or the battery is discharged, the moonroof and sunshade may not close properly. In this case, push and hold the
switch to the CLOSE position O4 to close
the moonroof.

If the moonroof switch does not operate
If the moonroof and sunshade do not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the operation system.
1. If the moonroof and sunshade are open, close them fully by repeatedly pushing
the moonroof switch to the CLOSE O2 and O4 position.
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch to
the CLOSE O4 position for 10 seconds.
3. After the moonroof and sunshade move slightly to the closed position and then move back a little, release the moonroof switch.
4. Push and hold the moonroof switch to
the CLOSE O4 position, and the glass
and shade will move.
5. Release the moonroof switch. Then the moonroof and sunshade will fully open and then fully close.
6. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.

Instruments and controls 2-115

INTERIOR LIGHTS

WARNING
The driver is always responsible for operating the moonroof properly, including the operation by all passengers. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the moonroof could result in serious injury or death.
� Do not allow children to operate the moonroof. Improper operation by children may cause an accident. If children or others get caught in the moonroof, it could cause serious injury.
� To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the moonroof, place the ignition switch in the OFF position when leaving the vehicle, and do not leave children and the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.
� Do not activate the auto-reverse function intentionally. If hands or face, etc. get caught in the moonroof, it could cause serious injury.

CAUTION
� Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sunshade when it is extending or retracting causing improper operation or damage to the sunshade.
� Do not push the sunshade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.
� Do not put any object into the sunshade inlet port as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade.
� Do not hang any object on the arm rail as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade.
� Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Doing so may elongate the sunshade. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

LIC4033
1 The interior light can be turned on re-
gardless of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position when any door is opened.
2 The interior lights can be set to operate
when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door is open, push the switch, the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position.

2-116 Instruments and controls

The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the driver's door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open.
NOTE:
The footwell lights and step lights (if so equipped) illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC4035
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switches again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

LIC1413
PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn on the personal lights, push and
release the switch O1 .
To turn off the personal lights, push and
release the switch O1 .

Instruments and controls 2-117

HOMELINK� UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

SIC2063A
CARGO LIGHT
The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-position switch. To operate, push the switch to the desired position.
1 ON: The light is illuminated.
2 DOOR: The light illuminates when the
liftgate is opened. The light turns off when the liftgate is closed.
3 OFF: The light does not illuminate re-
gardless of liftgate position or lock status.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual handheld transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink� Universal Transceiver:
� Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
� Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle's battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink� will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink� Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink� Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, see "Programming HomeLink�" (P. 2-119).

2-118 Instruments and controls

WARNING
� Your vehicle's engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. For additional information, see "Pushbutton ignition switch" (P. 5-13). Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
� Do not use the HomeLink� Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

� During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc., that you are programming.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK�
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink� buttons, refer to the HomeLink� web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ON position (without starting the engine) when programming HomeLink�. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink� for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency.

LIC2365
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1�3 in (2�8 cm) away from the HomeLink� surface, keeping the
HomeLink� indicator light O1 in view.

Instruments and controls 2-119

LIC4095
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink� button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the HomeLink� indica-
tor light O1 flashes slowly and then rap-
idly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in "Programming HomeLink� for Canadian customers and gate openers" (P. 2-121).
3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink� button and observe the indicator light.
� If the indicator light O1 is solid/
continuous, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink� button is pressed and released.
� If the indicator light O1 blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener's manual.
5. Press and release the "learn" or "smart" button.
NOTE: Once the button is pressed, you have approximately 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink� button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence up to three times to complete the training process. HomeLink� should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink� buttons, refer to the HomeLink� web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

2-120 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK� FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission � which may not be long enough for HomeLink� to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "timeout" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Training" procedures, replace "Programming HomeLink�" step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.
1. For additional information, see "Programming HomeLink�" step 1 (P. 2-119).

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink� button and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink� button while you press and re-press ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink� indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink� indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Proceed with "Programming HomeLink�" step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK� UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink� Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink� does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:
� Replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
� Position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink� surface.
� Press and hold both the HomeLink� and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

Instruments and controls 2-121

� Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 in (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink� surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink� is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position � keeping the indicator light in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink� buttons, refer to the HomeLink� web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, see "Reprogramming a single HomeLink� button" (P. 2-122).
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink� buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink� is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming HomeLink�" - Step 1.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK� BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink� Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink� button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink� button, proceed with "Programming HomeLink�" - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink� at: www.homelink.com or 1�800�355�3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink� Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink� button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink� buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink�. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink� Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

2-122 Instruments and controls

For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-123

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
NISSAN Intelligent Key� system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 NISSAN Intelligent Key� Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-18 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Operating the manual liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Liftgate position setting (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Liftgate position setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Automatic operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-31
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Memory Seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Setting memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

KEYS

LPD2842
Type A (if so equipped) 1. Intelligent Key (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY�
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle's Intelligent Key System components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

LPD2844
Type B (if so equipped)
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent Key System and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD3021
Type C (if so equipped)
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
� Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
� Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
� Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.
� Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
� Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
� Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140�F (60�C).
� Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
� Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
SPA1951
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key. To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver's door and glove box.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.
For additional information, see "Doors" (P. 3-5) and "Glove box" (P. 2-104).
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.
To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedure below.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you.
For additional information, see "Glove box" (P. 2-104).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any virtual key accessories (if so equipped) will also have to be reregistered. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOORS

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
� Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
� Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

� To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

Driver's side
LOCKING WITH KEY

LPD3159

To lock the door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle
O2 . This will only lock the corresponding
door and will not activate the security system. To arm the security system, press the
button on the Intelligent Key.

To unlock the corresponding door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward
the front of the vehicle O1 . This will only
unlock the corresponding door and will not disarm the security system.

For additional information, see "Security systems" (P. 2-71).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LPD2862
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position O1 ,
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position
O2 .

LPD3167
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passen-
ger's side) to the lock position O1 . When
locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front pas-
senger's side) to the unlock position O2 .

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle while any door is open, a warning chime will sound and all doors unlock automatically.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
� All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
� All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the Shift to P position or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY� SYSTEM

LPD3157
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position, the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

CAUTION

� Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
� The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or touching the lock sensor on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.

� Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
� Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving and transmitting radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves from various distances. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions:
� When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
� When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a CB radio.
� When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
� When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
� When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.
� When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery's life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a yellow indicator illuminates with the message "Key Battery Low" in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
Since the Intelligent Key is capable of receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-25).
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

LPD2929
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the lock
sensor O1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)
from each lock sensor O1 .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the lock sensors may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to touch the lock sensor and the capacity sensor to lock/unlock the doors.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

� To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.
� Do not pull the door handle before touching the door handle lock sensor. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2554
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION
� Do not touch the door handle lock sensor with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
� After locking with the door handle lock sensor, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

LPD3160
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY� OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag. When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by touching the door handle lock and capacitive sensors within the range of operation.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

� Doors do not lock with the door handle lock sensor with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

Locking doors

LPD3161

1. Push the P (Park) button, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle lock sensor while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors will lock.

5. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice.

LPD3269
NOTE:
� Lock sensors for all doors can be deactivated when the Ext. Door Switch feature is switched to OFF using the "Vehicle Settings" menu in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

WARNING
After locking the doors using the lock sensor, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.
CAUTION
� When locking the doors using the lock sensor, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the lock sensor to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
� The lock sensor is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
When any door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; a chime will sound and the lock will automatically unlock.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the lock sensor to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions: � When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel. � When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin. � When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets. � When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
LPD3161
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key. 2. Wrap hand around the door handle to ac-
tivate the capacitive unlock sensor OA .
When unlocking from the front passenger doors, rear doors or liftgate, all vehicle doors will unlock. When unlocking from the driver's door handle, the driver's door will unlock.
3. The warning indicator lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Driver door: release the door handle and touch the lock sensor within 2 minutes
to unlock all doors OB .
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

NOTE:

LPD3185

Lock sensors for all doors can be deactivated when the Ext. Door Switch feature is switched to OFF using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

LPD3270
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, touch the door handle lock sensor to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after touching the lock sensor.
� Opening any door.
� Pushing the ignition switch.

Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked.
The lights can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:
� Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
� Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
� Switching the interior light switch to the OFF position.
� Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to the OFF position in the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
For additional information, see "Interior lights" (P. 2-116).

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: � When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range. � When the doors or the rear liftgate are
open or not closed securely. � When the Intelligent Key battery is
discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

Type A (if so equipped)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(panic) button

LPD3600

Type B (if so equipped)

(remote engine start)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(panic) button

LPD3602

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Type C (if so equipped)

(remote engine start)

(lock) button

(unlock) button

(liftgate) button

(panic) button

LPD3026

Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
2. Close all doors.

3. Press the gent Key.

button on the Intelli-

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WARNING
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may decrease the safety and security of your vehicle.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the Key.

button on the Intelligent

2. The hazard indicator lights flash once and the driver's door will unlock.

3. Press the

button again within 1

minute to unlock all doors and liftgate.

NOTE:
The Selective Unlock feature can be changed using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the
button: � Opening any doors. � Pushing the ignition switch.
Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of time when a door is unlocked.
The lights can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations: � Placing the ignition switch in the ON
position. � Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. � Switching the interior light switch to the
OFF position.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

� Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to the OFF position in the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
For additional information, see "Interior lights" (P. 2-116).

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.

All doors must be closed and the key must be outside the vehicle.

To open the windows, press and hold the button on the Intelligent Key for lon-
ger than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the

button on the Intelligent Key.

To interrupt opening of the windows, re-

lease the

button.

Releasing the rear liftgate (if so equipped)

The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by performing the following:

� Press the

button for longer than 1

second to open the rear liftgate.

� Press the

button again for longer

than 1 second to close the rear liftgate.

When the

button is pressed during

the open or close process the liftgate will

stop. When pressed again, the liftgate will

reverse and go in the opposite direction.

Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the
button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
� It has run for a period of time.
� Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

� The lock sensor on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature

can be deactivated using the Intelligent

Key. When it is deactivated and the

button is pressed, the hazard indicator

lights flash twice. When the

button is

pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights

nor the horn operates.

NOTE:

If you can change the Answer Back Horn feature with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

To deactivate:

Press and hold the

and

but-

tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard

indicator lights will flash three times to con-

firm that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate:

Press and hold the

and

but-

tons for at least 2 seconds once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been

reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD2836
Intelligent Key button operation light
The light blinks only when you press any button on the Intelligent Key. The light illumination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or listen to verify that the vehicle has performed the intended operation.
If the light does not blink, your battery may be too weak to communicate to the vehicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to be replaced. For additional information re-

garding the replacement of a battery, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-25).
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, see "Troubleshooting guide" (P. 3-16) and "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom

When shifting the shift position to the The Push ignition to OFF warning ap-

P (Park) position

pears in the display.

When opening the driver's door to get out of the vehicle

The Door/Liftgate Open warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds three times twice, or a "Check Back Seat For All Articles" warning appears on the display.

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

When touching the door handle lock

sensor or the

button on the

Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine
When pushing the ignition switch

The Key low battery warning appears on the display.
The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.
The I-Key System Error warning message in the vehicle information display appears.

Possible Cause

Remedy

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The Rear Door Alert is activated.

Check the back seat for all articles, press the OK button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-25).

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intel- It is recommended that you visit a

ligent Key system.

NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

Start to have the vehicle in view or may restrict idling time except in freezing temperatures. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, see "Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work" (P. 3-20).
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� system" (P. 3-7).

LPD2995

The

button will be on the NISSAN

Intelligent Key� if the vehicle has Remote

Engine Start. This feature allows the engine

to start from outside the vehicle.

Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to either a heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional information, see "Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control" (P. 4-34).

Laws in some local communities may restrict or prohibit the use of Remote Engine Start, or the amount of time a parked vehicle engine may idle. For example, some laws require a person using Remote Engine

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
� To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

� Do not use Remote Engine Start in closed spaces such as a garage. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the

button to lock all doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the

vehicle is not within view press and hold

the

button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:
� The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
� The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
� The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, see "Extending engine run time" (P. 3-19).

Press and hold the brake pedal while switching the ignition to the ON position before driving. For additional information, see "Driving the vehicle" (P. 5-18).

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in "Remote starting the vehicle" (P. 3-19). Run time will be calculated as follows:
� The first 10�minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.
� The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
� Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles.
The vehicle must be driven at speeds of 4 MPH (7 km/h) before the remote engine start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:

� Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press

until the parking lights turn off.

� Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.

� Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.

� The extended engine run time has expired.

� The first 10�minute timer has expired.

� The engine hood has been opened.

� The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

� The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

� The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

� The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:

� The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

� The hood is not securely closed.

� The hazard indicator lights are on.

� The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

� The

button is not pressed and held

for at least 2 seconds.

� The

button is not pressed and held

within 5 seconds of pressing the lock

button.

� The brake is pressed.

� The doors are not closed and locked.

� The liftgate is open.

� The Key System Error warning message appears in the vehicle information display.

� The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

� Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.
� The vehicle is not in P (Park).
� There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
� The Remote Engine Start feature has been switched to the OFF position using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOOD

LIFTGATE

1. Pull the hood lock release handle O1 lo-
cated below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
2. Push the lever O2 upward, toward the
hood as illustrated with your fingertips
3. Raise the hood O3 .
4. Remove the support rod and insert into
the slot O4 .
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

LPD3164
WARNING
� Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
� If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING
� Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
� Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).
� To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
� Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

CAUTION
Do not use accessory carriers that attach to the liftgate. Doing so will cause damage to the vehicle.

LPD3162
OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors including the liftgate simultaneously.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate
opener switch OA and pull up on the
handle.
To close, lower and push the liftgate down securely.

LPD3163
OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
WARNING
� Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.
� Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD3171
Instrument panel switch NOTE:
To open, close or reverse the power liftgate, the shift position must be in P (Park). Also, the power liftgate will not operate if battery voltage is low.
Power Open: The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully closed position to the fully open position in approximately 5 � 8 seconds. The power open feature can be activated by the button on the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), the instrument panel switch or the liftgate open switch. A chime sounds

LPD3172
Liftgate opener switch
to indicate the power open sequence has been started.
� When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can be opened by the instrument panel switch, button on the Intelligent Key (if so
equipped) or liftgate opener switch OA
(with Intelligent Key in liftgate range). The liftgate will individually unlock and open. Once the liftgate is closed, the vehicle will remain in the unlock status.
� The Intelligent Key button (if so equipped) must be held for 1 second before the liftgate opens.

� The liftgate must be unlocked to open it
with the liftgate opener switch OA and
without the Intelligent Key in liftgate range.
� The switch on the liftgate OA can only be
used to open the liftgate if the Power Back Door feature is switched to ON using the "Vehicle Settings" menu in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
A warning chime will sound if the shift position is moved out of P (Park) during a power open operation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

LPD3173
Liftgate close switch
Power Close: The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully open position to the secondary position. When the liftgate reaches the secondary position, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close takes approximately 7 � 10 seconds. The power close feature can be activated by the button on the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), the in-
strument panel, the liftgate close switch OB and the liftgate lock switch OC . A chime
sounds to indicate the power close sequence has been started.

� If the liftgate opener switch OA is acti-
vated while the cinching motor is engaged, the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch.
� The Intelligent Key button (if so equipped) must be held for 1 second before the liftgate closes.
� The liftgate close switch OB can only be
used to close the liftgate if the power liftgate main switch is in the ON position.
� If the liftgate lock switch OC is activated
the liftgate will begin to close and all doors will lock.
Stop - Reverse: During an open/close movement, the liftgate can be stopped, if the Intelligent Key button (if so equipped), instrument panel or
liftgate opener switch OA , liftgate close switch OB or liftgate lock switch OC is
pushed. The liftgate can be reversed if the Intelligent Key button (if so equipped), in-
strument panel, liftgate opener switch OA or liftgate lock switch OC is pushed again.

Auto Reverse: If an obstacle is detected during power open or power close, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position. If a second obstacle is detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will enter manual mode.
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip during power close, the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open position.
NOTE:
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed, the power close function will not operate.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD3162
Manual Mode: If power operation is not available, the liftgate may be operated manually. Power operation may not be available if multiple obstacles have been detected in a single power cycle or if battery voltage is low.
If the power liftgate opener switch OA is
pushed during power open or close, the power operation will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated manually.
To open the liftgate manually, push the lift-
gate opener switch OA and lift the liftgate.
To close, lower and push the liftgate down securely.

LPD3012
LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING (if so equipped)
The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height by performing the following:
1. Open the liftgate using the liftgate opener switch or the Intelligent Key.
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have some resistance when being manually adjusted).

3. While holding the liftgate in position, push and hold the liftgate switch located on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds or until two beeps are heard.
The liftgate will open to the selected position setting. To change the position of the liftgate, repeat steps 1-3 for setting the position of the liftgate.
MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
The liftgate can be operated using a quick kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper.
To operate, the Intelligent Key must be within 31.5 in (80 cm) of the liftgate.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

CAUTION
Before performing the kicking motion, steady your stance to prevent any loss of balance. Also, while making the kicking motion, take caution around hot exhaust system parts. Otherwise, there may be danger of injury.

LPD3154
Activation zone
Proper operation technique
� While at the rear of the vehicle, begin making a quick forward kicking motion.
� Raise your foot straight under the center of the rear bumper then immediately return your foot to the ground in a continuous motion.
� The kicking motion should be straight, smooth and consistent.
� After your kick motion is complete, step back and allow the liftgate to open/close.

LPD3153
DO: Quick forward kick and return while the key fob is within range
� Three beeps will sound and the liftgate will begin moving within two seconds after the kick.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD3155
DO NOT: Swing foot side to side or pause during kick
WARNING
Prevent unintentional liftgate opening/ closing. There may be conditions when opening/closing the liftgate is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key out of range of the liftgate, (31.5 in or 80 cm), when washing or working around the back of the vehicle.

CAUTION
� Interference or malfunction can be caused by parking in close proximity to radio or satellite towers.
� Intelligent Key interference could be caused if you have your key fob stored next to your cell phone or any RF-enabled smart card. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� system" (P. 3-7).
LIFTGATE RELEASE
WARNING
� Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
� Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).
� To avoid personal injury, do not attempt to activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate struts are removed.

CAUTION
� If the power liftgate does not stay open or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the liftgate struts. It is recommended that you have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� Do not activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate struts are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power liftgate mechanisms may occur.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING

LPD2646
Manual liftgate release (if so equipped)
If the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked with the door lock switch or the Intelligent Key due to a discharged battery, follow these steps:
1. Remove the cover OA on the inside of the
liftgate.
2. Move the lever OB as illustrated to open
the liftgate.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for repair.

SPA2778
Power liftgate release (if so equipped)
If the liftgate cannot be opened with the instrument panel switch, liftgate opener switch or key fob due to a discharged battery, follow these steps:
1. Remove the cover OA on the inside of the
liftgate.
2. Move the lever OB as illustrated to open
the liftgate.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for repair.

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height by performing the following:
1. Open the liftgate using the liftgate opener switch or the Intelligent Key.
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have some resistance when being manually adjusted).
3. While holding the liftgate in position, push and hold the liftgate switch located on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds or until two beeps are heard.
The liftgate will open to the selected position setting. To change the position of the liftgate, repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of the liftgate.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

LPD2725
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the fuel-filler door, push the right side of the fuel-filler door to release.
WARNING
� Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

� Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
� Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
� Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:
� Always place the container on the ground when filling.
� Do not use electronic devices when filling.
� Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
� Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
� Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For additional information, see "Fuel recommendation" (P. 11-10).
� For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-19).
� If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

STEERING WHEEL

LPD3158

WARNING
� Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
� Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

MANUAL OPERATION (if so equipped)

LPD3169

Tilt and telescopic operation
Push the lock lever O1 down:
� Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction O2 to the desired position.
� Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction O3 to the desired
position.
Pull the lock lever O1 up firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD3170
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so equipped)
Tilt and telescopic operation
To adjust the steering wheel move the
switch O1 in the following directions:
� Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction O2 to the desired tilt position.
� Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction O3 to the desired
telescopic position.

CAUTION
For vehicles with memory seat: Failure to reset the tilt and telescoping functions of the steering wheel, after the vehicle's battery has been discharged, may prevent the steering wheel position from being adjusted.
For vehicles with memory seat: Both the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be reset after the vehicle's battery has been discharged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic operation from locking in one position. When the battery has been recharged or replaced, perform the following:
� For tilt operation: Adjust the switch O1 so
the steering wheel moves to the highest
position O2 that can be reached.
� For telescopic operation: Adjust the
switch O1 so the steering wheel moves to
the most forward and backward position
O3 that can be reached.
Performing these operations resets the range of the steering wheel's tilt and telescopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)
The memory seat will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver's door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. The steering wheel moves back into position when the driver's door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed.
For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

SUN VISORS

1. To block glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor O1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount and
swing the visor to the side O2 . 3. Slide the sun visor extension O3 in or out
as needed.

CAUTION
� Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.
� Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

LPD3174
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open.

LPD2154
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MIRRORS

LPD3156
Driver's and passenger's side
CARD HOLDER
To use the card holder, slide card into the clip. Do not view information while operating the vehicle.

WPD0126
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
Use the night position O1 to reduce glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position O2 when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

LPD0469
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during nighttime conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The indicator light O2 will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sen-
sors O1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen-
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.
The indicator light O2 will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press the O button. The indicator light will turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, press the | button again. The indicator light will turn on.
For additional information on HomeLink� Universal Transceiver operation, see "HomeLink� Universal Transceiver" (P. 2-118).

LPD3166
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Push the switch O1 or O2 to select the left
or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
desired position using the large switch O3 . Push the switch O1 or O2 and make sure
that the corresponding light is off, to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.

WARNING
� Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.
� Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD2112
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

LPD3186
Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)
CAUTION
� Do not touch the mirrors while they are moving. Your hand may be pinched, and the mirror may malfunction.
� Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You will be unable to see behind the vehicle.

Push the switch O1 to open the mirrors.
Push the switch again to close the mirrors.
If one of the mirrors are manually operated or bumped, the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by
pushing the switch O1 until completely
closed, then push the switch again until the mirrors are in the open position
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
The electric control type outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see "Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch" (P. 2-77).
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped)
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both outside mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror control switch is in either the L or R position.
The mirrors automatically return to their original position when you shift out of R (Reverse).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

MEMORY SEAT (if so equipped)

The outside mirror surfaces will return to their original position when one of the following conditions has occurred: � The shift lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse). � The outside mirror control switch is set to
the neutral or center position. � The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
If the outside mirror control switch is in the center position, the mirror surface will NOT turn downward when the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse).
For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).

The memory seat system has two features:
� Memory storage function
� Entry/exit function

LPD3165
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
Two positions for the driver's seat, steering wheel (if so equipped), and outside mirrors can be stored in the memory seat system. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel (if so equipped), and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see "Seats" (P. 1-2) and "Steering wheel" (P. 3-30) and "Outside mirrors" (P. 3-34).

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

2. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).
3. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
4. The chime will sound when the memory is stored.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory position will be overwritten by the new stored position.
Linking a key fob to a stored memory position
Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the following procedure.
1. Follow steps 1-3 in the "Memory storage function" section for storing the memory position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will come on. While the

indicator light is on for 5 seconds, press

the

button on the key fob. The haz-

ard lights will flash twice. The indicator

light of the linked memory switch will

blink and click twice. After the indicator

light goes off, the key fob is linked to that

memory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is

in the OFF position, pressing the

but-

ton on the key fob will move the driver's

seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors to

the linked memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the linked memory switch, then the key fob will link the new position and overwrites the previous position.

Confirming memory storage
� Push the SET switch.
� If a memory position has been stored in the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the respective switch will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver's seat and steering wheel will automatically move when the shift position is in the P (Park). This allows the driver to easily get in and out of the driver's seat.
The driver's seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up:
� When the driver's door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
� When the ignition switch is changed from ACC to OFF with the driver's door open.
The driver's seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:
� When the ignition switch is changed from ACC or ON while the shift position is in the P (Park).
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled through "Vehicle Settings" in the vehicle information display by performing the following:
� Switch the Exit Seat Slide from on to off.
� Switch the Exit Steering UP from on to off.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

Restarting the entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the stored memory positions may be lost and some of the functions will be restricted.
1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).
OR
2. Open and close the driver's door more than two times with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
The entry/exit function should now work properly.
SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION
The position of the following settings can be linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized settings can be available for each Intelligent Key. � Climate control system � Audio system
To use the memory function, set the climate and audio systems to the driver's preferred settings. Lock the doors with the Intelligent Key. Each Intelligent Key may be set with the driver's individual preferences. When a new Intelligent Key is used, "Connection with the key has been done" will be

displayed on the vehicle information display and the memorized settings are available.
To engage the memorized settings, perform the following:
1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to the memorized settings.

2. Unlock the doors by wrapping hand

around the capacitive door handle or

the

button on the Intelligent Key.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The settings linked to the Intelligent Key will start.

For additional information on using the climate control system, see "Heater and air conditioner (automatic)" (P. 4-33).

SYSTEM OPERATION
The memory seat system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:
� When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph (7 km/h).
� When any of the memory switches are pushed while the memory seat is operating.

� When the switch for the driver's seat and steering wheel is pushed while the memory seat is operating.
� When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position.
� When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.
� When the shift position is moved from P (Park) to any other position.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect� Owner's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to turn on and off predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-8 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Intelligent Around View Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Intelligent Around View Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Camera aiding sonar (parking sensor) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Sonar system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Turning on and off the sonar function . . . . . . . 4-24 Sonar system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Turning MOD on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Rear automatic air conditioning system . . . . . 4-37
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
iPod�/iPhone� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

NISSANCONNECT� OWNER'S MANUAL

� Voice recognition � General system information

LHA5506
Refer to the digital NissanConnect� Owner's manual using the QR code on this page, or your printed NissanConnect� Owner's manual (if so equipped). This manual includes the following information: � NissanConnect� Services (if so equipped) � Navigation system (if so equipped) � Audio system � Apple CarPlay� � Android Auto TM � Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone system � Viewing information � Other settings
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button
WARNING
� Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

� RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

LHA5430
� The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

� The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

LHA5431
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located in the
rear bumper O1 .
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA4805
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line OA are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
� Red line O1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) � Yellow line O2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) � Green line O3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Vehicle width guide lines O4
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines O5
Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA5432
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA5433
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

object when backing up to the position OA
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

LHA4995
Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines OA do not touch
the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA5434
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position OC is shown farther than the position OB in the display. However, the position OC is actually at the same distance as the position OA . The vehicle may hit the

WARNING
� If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
� On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
� If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
� Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
� Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
� When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5043
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen OA when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES
To toggle on and off the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Press the CAMERA button.
2. Touch the "Predicted Course Lines" key to turn the feature on or off.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Press the CAMERA button.

LHA3522

2. Touch the "Display Settings" key.

3. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "�" key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
� Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

� Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
� Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
� Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
� Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.
� Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed in the rear bumper.
� When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
� Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
� When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
� When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
� Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
� The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
� The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
� Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.
� There may be a delay when switching between views.
� If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
� Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5431

CAUTION
� Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
� Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera O1 , the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5435

WARNING
� Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
� The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird's-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
� The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
� Front View A view of the front of the vehicle.
� Rear View A view of the rear of the vehicle.
� Bird's-Eye View The surrounding view of the vehicle from above.
� Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.
� Front-Wide View A wider area view of the front view.
� Rear-Wide View A wider area view of the rear view.

LHA5436
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle's outside mirrors and in the rear bum-
per O1 .
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

When the camera is first activated with the bird's-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so equipped) will flash on the screen. This indicates that the sonar system is activated. For additional information, see "Front and Rear Sonar System (RSS)" (P. 5-183).
Available views
WARNING
� The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
� Use the displayed lines and the bird's-eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird's-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
� If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird's-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.

� When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.
� Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.
� Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
� On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.
� The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front view

LHA5437

Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line OA are
displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
� Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) � Yellow line O2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) � Green line O3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) � Green line O4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)
(if so equipped)

The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines O6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

Rear view
Vehicle width guide lines O5

LHA5438

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines O6

Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and might not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

Front view Bird's-eye view

LHA4534

The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.
The vehicle icon O1 shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover
O2 (if so equipped) are indicated in black.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

LHA4535
Rear view
The non-viewable area O2 (if so equipped)
is highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the bird's-eye view is displayed. It will be shown only the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red and blink for the first 3
seconds O3 to remind the driver to be
cautious.

Predicted course lines O4 indicate the pre-
dicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position.
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the neutral position, the two green predicted course lines are shown in front of the vehicle.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predicted course line is shown in front of the vehicle and the other predicted course line is shown at the side of the vehicle.
When the monitor displays the rear view, the predicted course lines are shown at the back of the vehicle.

WARNING
� Objects in the bird's-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
� Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.
� Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
� The view of the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.
� A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA2652
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line O1 shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line O2 shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
The extensions O3 of both the front O1 and side O2 lines are shown with a green dotted
line.

Front-wide view Front-wide/Rear-wide view

LHA5439

While the front view/rear view shows a normal view on the split screens, the frontwide view/rear-wide view shows a wider area on the entire screen and allows checking of the blind corners on the left and right sides..

Distance guide lines

Indicates distances from the vehicle body:
� Red line O1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) � Yellow line O2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) � Green line O3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m) � Green line O4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Rear-wide view
Vehicle width guide lines O5

LHA5440

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines O6

Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines in the rear-wide view will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

The front-wide view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

NOTE:
� When the monitor displays the front-wide view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight ahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines O6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel is turns about 90 degrees or more, the predicted course line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA5441
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5442
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

object when backing up to the position OA
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

LHA5443
Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines OA do not touch
the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA5444
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position OC is shown farther than the position OB in the display. However, the position OC is actually at the same distance as the position OA . The vehicle may hit the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

LHA5445
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen OA when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA5446
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines OB enter the parking space OC .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines OD parallel to the parking space OC while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are: � Rear view/bird's-eye view split screen � Rear view/front-side view split screen
� Rear-wide view

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (drive) position, the available views are: � Front view/bird's-eye view split screen � Front view/front-side view split screen
� Front-wide view
The display will switch from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when:
� The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
� A different screen is selected.

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

LHA5447

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Touch the "Settings" key.

3. Touch the "Camera" key.

4. Touch the "Display Settings" key.

5. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.

6. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "�" key on the touch-screen display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

LHA5448
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� Do not use the Intelligent Around View Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
� The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.
� The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and in the rear bumper. Do not put anything on the vehicle that covers the cameras.
� When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

� Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be
viewed O1 . When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object near the seam O2 of the camera
viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
� There may be a delay when switching between views.
� When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.
� When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
� The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
� The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

� Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.
� There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird'seye view.
� Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA5449
System temporarily unavailable
When the "!" icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LHA5450
When the "[X]" icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected if it occurs frequently. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

CAMERA AIDING SONAR (parking sensor) (if so equipped)

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5436

CAUTION
� Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
� Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras O1 , the Intelligent Around
View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar function as outlined in this section could result in serious injury or death.
� The sonar is a convenience feature. It is not a substitute for proper parking.
� This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
� The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
� Always look around and check that it is safe to move before parking.
� Read and understand the limitations of the sonar as contained in this section.
The sonar function helps to inform the driver of large stationary objects around the vehicle when parking by issuing an audible and visual alert.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Center display 2. MENU button 3. CAMERA button

LHA5480
The system gives the tone for rear objects when the shift lever is in the "R" (Reverse) position.
When the camera image is shown on the center display, the system shows the sonar indicator regardless of the shift lever position.

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
The colors of the sonar indicators and the distance guide lines in the front and rear views indicate different distances to the object.
When the objects are detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the tone increase. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an object is detected by only the corner sonar and the distance does not change.
The tone will stop when the object is no longer near the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR FUNCTION
When the "Sonar" key is selected, the indicator will turn off and the sonar will be turned off temporarily. The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system will also be turned off at the same time. For additional information, refer to "Moving Object Detection (MOD) in this section. When the "Sonar" key is selected again, the indicator will turn on and the sonar will turn back on.
In the below cases, the sonar will be turned back on automatically:
� When the shift lever is placed in the "R" (Reverse) position.
� When the CAMERA button is pressed and a screen other than the camera view is shown on the display.
� When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
� When the ignition switch is placed in the "OFF" position and turned back to the "ON" position again. To prevent the sonar system from activating altogether, use the "Camera" menu. For additional information, see "Sonar function settings" (P. 4-24).

Sonar function settings
To set up the sonar function to your preferred settings, press the MENU button, select the "Settings" key, select the "Camera/ Sonar" key and then select the "Sonar" key on the center display.
Designs and items displayed on the screen may vary depending on the models.
Sonar: When this item is turned on, the rear sonar is activated. When this item is turned off (indicator turns off), the rear sonar is deactivated. The amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon. The next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, "sonar is OFF" is displayed briefly. Sonar Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar higher (right) or lower (left). Sonar Volume: Adjust the volume of the buzzer. Towing mode (if so equipped): When this item is turned on, only the rear sonar is off. The amber markers are displayed at the rear corners of the vehicle icon.

Show Camera when Sonar Activate (if so equipped): When this item is turned on, the camera view is automatically shown on the display in the case that the distance to the objects measured by the sonar is becoming short.
SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar function. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system, including reduced performance or a false activation.
� The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.
� The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

� The system may not detect the following objects:
� Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, grass or wool.
� Thin objects such as rope, wire or chain.
� Wedge-shaped objects.
� If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of objects or false alarms.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
Keep the surface of the sonar sensors (located on the front and rear bumper fascia) free from accumulations of snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the sonar sensors when cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

CAUTION
Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.
System temporarily unavailable
When the amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon and the function cannot be activated from the Camera setting menu (the setting items are grayed out), the sonar system may be malfunctioning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

1. CAMERA button
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5435

WARNING
� Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
� The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
� The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
� The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:
� When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
� When the CAMERA button is pressed to activate the camera view on the display.
� When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.

LHA5451
Front and bird's-eye views
The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:
� When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird's-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

LHA5452
Rear and bird's-eye views
� When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.
� When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the liftgate is open.

LHA5453
Rear and front-side views The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.
NOTE:
While the RCTA chime is beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA5454
Front-wide view / Rear-wide View
In the bird's-eye view, the yellow frame O1 is
displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame O2 is displayed on each
view in the front view and rear view modes.
A green MOD icon O3 is displayed in the
view where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon O3 is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Press the

button on the

steering wheel and select "Settings" in

the vehicle information display.

2. Using the scroll dial, select "Driver Assistance" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Parking Aids".

4. Toggle ON or OFF "Moving Object" using the OK button.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
� Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

� The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
� When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.
� When there is a blinking source of light.
� When strong light such as another vehicle's headlight or sunlight is present.
� When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.
� When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.
� When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
� The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
� The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.

� If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.
� When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
The green MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred:
� When the system is malfunctioning.
� When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink).
� When the RearView camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras O1 , the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

LHA5436

CAUTION
� Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
� Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VENTS

Adjust air flow direction for the center vents
O1 , driver's and passenger's side vents O2 ,
and rear passenger compartment vents
O3 by moving the vent slide and/or vent
assemblies. Open or close the vents using the dial.

LHA5427
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic)

Heated seat switches (if so

equipped)

2. AUTO (automatic) climate control

button/ temperature control dial

(driver's side)

3. Display screen

4. REAR ON-OFF button

5. REAR CTRL (rear climate display screen)

button

6. REAR LOCK button

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped)

8. SYNC button/ temperature control dial

(passenger's side)

LHA5473

Climate controlled seat switches

(if so equipped)

10. A/C (air conditioner) button

11.

REAR window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

12.

Front defroster button

13.

Air flow control button

14.

Fan speed control buttons

15.

Fresh air intake button

16.

Air recirculation button

17. ON-OFF button

WARNING
� The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
� Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
� Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.
NOTE:
� Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

� When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution, air intake control, and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.
� Adjust the temperature display to about 75�F (24�C) for normal operation.
� The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, air intake control and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

� A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver's and front passenger's side temperature using each temperature control dial.
� To synchronize the driver's and front passenger's temperature settings, press the SYNC button. The SYNC indicator will illuminate.
Heating (A/C off)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.
� The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, air intake control and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
� Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the

front defroster button on.

(The indicator light on the button will

come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

� To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed control buttons to set the fan speed to maximum.

� As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

� When the

front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside tempera-

tures above 36�F (2�C). The air recirculate

mode automatically turns off, allowing

outside air to be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment to further improve the

defogging performance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)

Fan speed control

Press the

fan speed control buttons

to manually control the fan speed.

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster, heated seats (if so equipped) and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated automatically.
Voice Recognition logic (if so equipped)
When the climate control system is on, the front and rear fan speeds may be automatically lowered so that commands are more easily recognized. Fan speed can be adjusted using the fan speed decrease and increase buttons, if desired.
MANUAL OPERATION

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. Temperature can be adjusted on the driver's and passenger's side.

Air recirculation

Press the

air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The

indicator light on the button will

come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the

front

defrosting mode.

When the outside temperature exceeds 70�F (21�C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the air recirculation button (indicator will turn off) to enter fresh air mode.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fresh air intake

Press the

fresh air intake button to

draw outside air into the passenger

compartment.

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, press the

fan speed

control buttons to the desired position and

press the

button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the

button again.

The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Pressing the

air flow control button

manually controls air flow and selects the

air outlet:

-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
-- Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

Synchronize climate settings
Press the SYNC button to synchronize climate settings. The sync indicator will turn on.
When rear climate is off, pressing SYNC will synchronize only driver's and front passenger's climate settings. When rear climate is on, pressing SYNC will synchronize driver, front passenger, and rear temperature mode and auto fan settings.
SYNC text will appear above the rear temperature display when rear climate is synchronized with the driver's settings.
To change climate settings when SYNC is active (the SYNC indicator is on):
� The driver's side temperature control dial will control the driver, front passenger, and rear (if rear climate is on) temperatures.
� The fan speed control buttons will control the front and rear climate fan speeds.
� The front AUTO (automatic) climate control ON-OFF button will activate the front and rear climate automatic settings.
� The air flow control button will control the front and rear airflow direction.

To exit SYNC:
� To remove the front passenger from SYNC, turn the passenger's side temperature control dial. The driver and rear settings remain in SYNC until rear is removed from SYNC.
� To remove the rear from SYNC, change any of the rear climate settings. The driver and front passenger settings remain in SYNC until the front passenger is removed from SYNC.
� To reactivate SYNC press the SYNC button.
To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button to turn the system off.
To turn system on
Press the ON-OFF button when the heater or air conditioner is off. The system will turn on with the settings that were used immediately before the system was turned off.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to "Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch" (P. 2-77).
Heated seat switches (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Heated seat switches (if so equipped)" (P. 2-86).
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)" (P. 2-88).
Climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped)
For additional information, see "Climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped)" (P. 2-85).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

LHA5465
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver's side of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

� When the climate system is in automatic operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow outlet may default to defroster mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow outlet will return to foot mode and operation will continue normally.
� When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. You may notice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level mode or side demist vent outlets for a maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur when the previous climate setting was turned off. This is not a malfunction. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, the air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate control button.
� Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation.

� If you feel that the air flow mode you have

selected and the outlets the air is coming

out do not match, select the

mode.

� When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot outlets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To adjust the front air conditioning system, press the REAR CTRL button

Automatic operation

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature control dials to set desired temperature.

LHA5426

Front Controls

REAR AUTOMATIC AIR

Fan speed control buttons

CONDITIONING SYSTEM

9. ON-OFF button

1. AUTO button/ temperature control dial (driver's side)
2. Display screen 3. REAR ON-OFF button 4. REAR CTRL button 5. REAR LOCK button

To turn on the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel, press the REAR ON-OFF button.
The rear automatic air conditioning system can be adjusted with the front air conditioner control panel by pressing the REAR CTRL button.

6. SYNC button/ temperature control dial The front climate display will switch to the

(passenger's side)

REAR climate screen.

7. A/C (air conditioner) button

Manual operation

� Temperature control Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

� Fan speed control

Press the

Fan speed control buttons

to manually control the fan speed.

Rear Heating

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator button will illuminate on the front display.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

Turning the system off
� Press the REAR ON-OFF button on the front display to turn the rear climate system off. The indicator light will turn off.
� Press the ON-OFF button. The rear climate will turn off and the control will switch to front climate.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Locking the REAR controls
1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front climate control panel. LOCK will be displayed on the rear climate display screen.
2. The rear climate controls will be locked and can only be adjusted using the front controls.

Rear control buttons

Fan speed control buttons

2. Display screen

LHA5474
Rear Controls
The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear automatic air conditioning system using the control buttons at the rear of the center console.

3. Temperature control buttons

Heated 2nd row seat switches (if so

equipped)

5. ON-OFF button

6. Air flow control buttons

7. AUTO button

The rear control buttons do not function when the REAR LOCK button is on.

� Fan speed control buttons

adjusts

the rear fan speed up or down.

� Temperature

increase and

decrease buttons adjusts the rear

temperature up or down.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

ANTENNA

� Heated 2nd row seat switches (if so equipped) For additional information, see "Heated 2nd row seat switches (if so equipped)" (P. 2-87).
� ON-OFF button Turns rear automatic air conditioning system on and off.
� Air flow control buttons controls air flow and selects the air outlet.
� AUTO button Turns rear automatic air conditioning system on, AUTO mode on.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-8).
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your "environmentally friendly" air conditioner system.

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin antenna and an antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.
CAUTION
� Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
� When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

iPod�/IPHONE�

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.
WARNING
� A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
� If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
� If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
� Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
� Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
� Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
� Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
� For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

"Made for iPod", "Made for iPhone" and "Made for iPad" mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wireless performance.
iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-14 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 NISSAN Intelligent Key� battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-17
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Automatic Transmission (A/T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Electronic parking brake (switch type) . . . . . . . 5-24

Automatic brake hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 How to activate/deactivate the automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 How to use the automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Drive Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 STANDARD MODE (2WD models)/AUTO MODE (4WD models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 SPORT mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 SNOW mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 TOW mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 MUD/RUT mode (4WD models only) . . . . . . . . . 5-30 SAND mode (4WD models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 ECO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-32 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-38 LDW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
I-LI system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 How to enable/disable the I-LI system . . . . . . 5-45 I-LI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-53 BSW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
I-BSI system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63 How to enable/disable the I-BSI system . . . . . 5-65 I-BSI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 I-BSI driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-68 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75 RCTA system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76 How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-80 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-84
Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85 Cruise control operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86 ProPILOT Assist system operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-88 Turning the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93 Operating ProPILOT Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94 How to enable/disable the Steering Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 5-102 Steering Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129 RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130 Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132 RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137 Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . 5-149 I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153 I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165 Intelligent Driver Alertness system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169
Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-171
Intelligent 4X4 (I-4X4) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .5-171
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-177
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . 5-177 How to turn off the VDC system . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179 Rise-up and build-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179 Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179
Chassis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180

Active Ride Control (ARC) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181
Hill descent control system (if so equipped) . . . 5-181
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-182
Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-183
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-184 How to enable/disable the front and rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-186 Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-187 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188 System maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-188
Idling Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-189

Retrograde movement control function . . . . 5-191 Idling Stop System display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-191 Idling Stop OFF switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-193
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-194 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-195 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-195 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-195

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING
� Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
� Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
� Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

� If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

� Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

� Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

� Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the

air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial

to high to circulate the air.

� If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the liftgate or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

� The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
� The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

5-4 Starting and driving

� Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
� Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
� Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
� Do not race the engine while warming it up.

� Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check all your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Starting and driving 5-5

Additional information:
� When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
� The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
� The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
� The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.
� The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
5-6 Starting and driving

� The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
� Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
� The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver's door opening.
� You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position.
For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 6-3).

WARNING
� Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
� If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. For additional information, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).

� When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
� Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
� The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

� Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
� Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
� If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
� If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases.
� If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.
� If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.
� If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-7

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire. � If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the
5-8 Starting and driving

tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
� If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
� The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions: � If there is interference from an external device or transmitter. � The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire. � There is a malfunction in the TPMS. � There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators. � The identification code of the tire pressure sensor is not registered to the system. � The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
� If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-Wheel Drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
For additional information, see "Driving safety precautions" (P. 5-10) .

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the "Safety � Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
� If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a "blow-out" can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29). If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or "blows-out" while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide.
Starting and driving 5-9

The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. � The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire. � Do not rapidly apply the brakes. � Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal. � Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, see "Changing a flat tire" (P. 6-4).
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) models are less capable than 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

5-10 Starting and driving

Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
� Spinning the front wheels on slippery surfaces may cause the AWD warning message to display and the 4WD system to automatically switch from the 4WD to the 2WD mode. This could reduce the traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (4WD models).
� Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain.
� Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward.
� Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over.

� Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
� Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a dropoff or other hazard that could cause an accident.
� If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed.
� Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed.
� Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.

� Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over.
� Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving offroad. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
� Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.
� Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may become hot.
� Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
� Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with 4WD engaged.
Starting and driving 5-11

� For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
� Do not attempt to test an 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
� When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.

� Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.
� If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars.
� Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident.
� Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the front wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.
� Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For additional information, see "Brake system" (P. 5-175).
� Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured.

� Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional information, see "Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions" (P. 9-7).

5-12 Starting and driving

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

LSD2645
When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate.
Push the ignition switch center: � Once to change to ON. � Two times to change to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position.
The shift position can be shifted from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display � 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display � 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

Starting and driving 5-13

LSD2020
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system's operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle O1 .
� The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.
� If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel or inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
� If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if the engine is started.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
AUTO ACC:
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you and the ignition placed from ON to OFF, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the driver's door is opened.

5-14 Starting and driving

After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation (if so equipped), and Bluetooth� Hands-Free Phone System may be restarted by turning on the audio system (see separate NissanConnect� Owner's Manual), or by pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key for up to a total of 30 minutes.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
� Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
� Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

SSD0860
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY� BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key� is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.
NOTE:
� When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
� If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, see "Battery replacement" (P. 8-25).

Starting and driving 5-15

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

� Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
� Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
� Check that all windows and lights are clean.
� Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.
� Lock all doors.
� Position seat and adjust headrests/head restraints.
� Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
� Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
� Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12).

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Confirm that the vehicle is in the P (Park) position.
The Intelligent Key must be carried when operating the ignition switch.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.
� If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
� If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to the LOCK position. After

5-16 Starting and driving

cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position, and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift position can be shifted from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

2. Apply the brake. 3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position. For additional information, see "NISSAN Intelligent Key� system" (P. 3-7).
Starting and driving 5-17

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)
WARNING
� Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
� Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
� Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
� Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

CAUTION
� To avoid possible damage to your vehicle; when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
� Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
The A/T in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the A/T if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift position out of the P (Park) position. This Automatic Transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift position cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or AUTO ACC position while the ready light illuminates.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

5-18 Starting and driving

WARNING
� Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
� Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
� Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
� Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

LSD4138
Shifting
OA Home position (central position)
Press the button O1 to shift

Shift without pressing the button O1

Press the park button O2 to shift to the P
(Park) position. After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal, press the shift lever button O1
Starting and driving 5-19

and move the shift lever from the P (Park)
position O2 to any of the desired shift
positions.
Confirm that the vehicle is in the desired shift position by checking the shift indicator located on the shift lever or in the vehicle information display.
WARNING
Apply the electronic parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
CAUTION
� Use the P (Park), R (Reverse) or D (Drive) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
� When switching to the desired shift position by operating the shift lever, check that the shift lever returns to the home position by releasing your hand from the lever. Holding the shift lever in a mid-way position may also damage the shift control system.
5-20 Starting and driving

� Do not operate the shift lever while the accelerator pedal is depressed. This may cause a sudden start which could result in an accident.
� The following operations are not allowed because excessive force would be applied to the transmission and this may result in damage to the vehicle: � Moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position when driving forward � Moving the shift lever to the D (Drive) position when reversing
If these operations are attempted, a chime sounds and the vehicle shifts to the N (Neutral) position.
P (Park)
CAUTION
� To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
� Do not slide the shift lever while pressing the park button. This may damage the shift control system.

Use the P (Park) position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before pressing the park button to engage the P (Park) position. For maximum safety, the brake pedal must be depressed before engaging the P (Park) position. Use this position together with the electronic parking brake. When parking on a hill, first depress the brake pedal, apply the electronic parking brake and then engage the P (Park) position. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. In order to secure the vehicle, always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock.
In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle's electronics, the transmission may lock in the P (Park) position. Have the vehicle's electronics checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The P (Park) position is automatically engaged if:
� You place the ignition switch in the OFF position

� You unfasten the driver's seat belt and open the driver side door when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in the D (Drive) position, the N (Neutral) position.
CAUTION
To avoid A/T malfunction, it is recommended that you manually place the shift position in the P (Park) position under the above conditions.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pressed to move the shift lever from the home position to R (Reverse). If the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward, the chime will sound and the vehicle will switch into the N (Neutral) position.

N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.
You can select this position by holding the shift lever at this position for 0.5 seconds.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving. The A/T changes gears automatically. All forward gears are available. If the vehicle is placed in the D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing, the chime will sound and the vehicle will switch into the N (Neutral) position.

LSD4194
Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is moved to the D (Drive) position again with the vehicle in the D (Drive) position while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by pulling the paddle shifters on the steering wheel.
When shifting up, pull the right-side paddle
shifter (+) OA . The transmission shifts to the
higher range.
When shifting down, pull the left-side
paddle shifter (-) OB . The transmission
shifts to the lower range.
Starting and driving 5-21

When canceling the manual shift mode, move the shift lever to the D (Drive) position again. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode.
When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D (Drive) position, the transmission will shift to the upper or lower range temporarily. The transmission will automatically return to the D (Drive) position after a short period of time. If you want to return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed in the vehicle information display.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 6M 7M 8M 9M
9M (9th) and 8M (8th)
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.
7M (7th), 6M (6th) and 5M (5th)
Use these positions when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

4M (4th), 3M (3rd) and 2M (2nd)
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.
1M (1st)
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.
� Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than the 8th range. This reduces fuel economy.
� Pulling the same paddle shifter twice will shift the ranges in succession. However, if this motion is rapidly done, the second shifting may not be completed properly.
� In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
� In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop.

Accelerator downshift -- in D (Drive) position --
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.

5-22 Starting and driving

PARKING BRAKE

Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P. 2-19). This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

WARNING
� Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
� Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
� Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
� To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

Starting and driving 5-23

LSD4139
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (switch type)
The electronic parking brake can be applied or released by operating the parking brake switch.

WARNING
� Before leaving the vehicle, move the shift position to the P (Park) position and check that the electronic parking brake warning light is illuminated to confirm that the electronic parking brake is applied. The electronic parking brake warning light will remain on for a period of time after the driver's door is locked.
CAUTION
When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32�F (0�C), the parking brake, if applied, may freeze in place and may be difficult to release.
For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and securely block the wheels.

NOTE:
� To keep the electronic parking brake released after the engine is turned off, place the ignition switch in the OFF position, depress the brake pedal and push down the parking brake switch before opening the driver's door.
� If a malfunction occurs in the electronic parking brake system (for example, due to battery discharge), it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Manual operation

To apply: Pull the switch up O1 . The indicator light OA will illuminate.

To release: With the ignition switch in the ON position, depress the brake pedal and
push the switch down O2 . The indicator light OA will turn off.

Before driving, check that the electronic

parking brake indicator light (

or PARK)

goes out. For additional information, see

"Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders" (P. 2-12).

5-24 Starting and driving

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD

NOTE:
� While the electronic parking brake is applied or released, an operating sound is heard from the lower side of the rear seat. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
� When the electronic parking brake is frequently applied and released in a short period of time, the parking brake may not operate in order to prevent the parking brake system from overheating. If this occurs, operate the electronic parking brake switch again after waiting approximately 1 minute.
� If the electronic parking brake must be applied while driving in an emergency, pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you release the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be released.

� While pulling up the electronic parking brake switch during driving, the parking brake is applied and a chime sounds. The electronic parking brake indicator light in the meter and in the parking brake switch illuminates. This does not indicate a malfunction. The electronic parking brake indicator light in the meter and in the parking brake switch turns off when the parking brake is released.
� When pulling the electronic parking brake switch up with the ignition switch in the OFF or AUTO ACC position, the parking brake switch indicator light will continue to illuminate for a short period of time.

The automatic brake hold function maintains the braking force without the driver having to depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or intersection. As soon as the driver depresses the accelerator pedal again, the automatic brake hold function is deactivated and the braking force is released. The operating status of the automatic brake hold can be displayed on the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12).
WARNING
� The automatic brake hold function is not designed to hold the vehicle on a steep hill or slippery road. Never use the automatic brake hold when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or slippery road. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move.
� The automatic brake hold warning may appear in the vehicle information display to request that the driver retake control by depressing the brake pedal.

Starting and driving 5-25

� When the automatic brake hold function is activated but fails to maintain the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the vehicle unexpectedly moves due to outside conditions, the chime may sound and automatic brake hold warning may illuminate in the vehicle information display.
� Be sure to deactivate the automatic brake hold function when using a car wash or towing your vehicle.
� Make sure to place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle, entering or exiting the vehicle, or loading luggage. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

� If any of the following conditions occur, the automatic brake hold function may not function. Have the system checked promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these conditions could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
� A warning message appears in the vehicle information display.
� The indicator light on the automatic brake hold switch does not illuminate when the switch is pushed.

� The automatic brake hold function will not be activated if the Slip indicator light, electronic parking brake warning light or master warning light illuminate and the chassis control system fault message appears in the vehicle information display.
� To maintain the braking force to keep the vehicle to a standstill, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

5-26 Starting and driving

LSD4140
HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION
How to activate the automatic brake hold function
1. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the automatic brake hold
switch O1 . The indicator light on the automatic brake hold switch O2
illuminates.
2. When the automatic brake hold function goes into standby, the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminates.

To use the automatic brake hold function, the following conditions need to be met: � The driver's seat belt is fastened. � The electronic parking brake is released. � The vehicle is not in the P (Park) position.
NOTE:
The automatic brake hold function retains the last state even if the engine is restarted.
How to deactivate the automatic brake hold function
While the automatic brake hold function is activated, push the automatic brake hold switch to turn off the automatic brake hold indicator light and deactivate the automatic brake hold function. To deactivate the automatic brake hold function while the brake force has been maintained by the automatic brake hold function, depress the brake pedal and push the automatic brake hold switch.

WARNING
Make sure to firmly depress and hold the brake pedal when turning off the automatic brake hold function while the brake force is applied. When the automatic brake hold function is deactivated, the brake force will be released. This could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling may result in serious personal injury or property damage.
HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION
For additional information on using the automatic brake hold function, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
To maintain braking force automatically
With the automatic brake hold function activated and the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminated on the meter, depress the braking pedal to stop the vehicle. The brake force is automatically maintained without your foot depressed on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is
Starting and driving 5-27

DRIVE MODE SELECTOR

maintained, the automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates on the meter.
To start the vehicle from a standstill
With the vehicle not in the P (Park) or the shift lever not in the N (Neutral) position, depress the accelerator pedal while the brake force is maintained. The brake force will automatically be released to restart the vehicle.
The automatic brake hold indicator light (white) on the meter illuminates and the automatic brake hold returns to standby.
Parking
When the park button is pushed to engage the P (Park) position with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off. When the parking brake is applied with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off.

NOTE:
� When the vehicle stops, but the brake force is not automatically applied, depress the brake pedal firmly until the automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates.

LSD4141
Drive Mode Selector switch (2WD models)
Multiple driving modes can be selected by using the Drive Mode Selector.
2WD: TOW, SPORT, STANDARD, ECO, and SNOW
To change the mode, push the Drive Mode Selector up or down.
4WD: SAND, MUD/RUT, SNOW, AUTO, ECO, SPORT, and TOW
To change the mode, turn the Drive Mode Selector left or right.

5-28 Starting and driving

LSD4142
Drive Mode Selector switch (4WD models)
NOTE:
When the Drive Mode Selector switch selects a mode, the mode may not switch immediately. This is not a malfunction.
The current mode is displayed in the vehicle information display. The mode list will appear in the vehicle information display and you can select the mode.

NOTE:
The mode list will be turned off in approximately 5 seconds after the mode is selected.
If the driving mode cannot be switched using the Drive Mode Selector when the ignition switch is in the ON position, have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
Do not stare at the Drive Mode Selector or the display while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
STANDARD MODE (2WD models)/ AUTO MODE (4WD models)
This is the standard mode that is most suitable for normal driving.
This mode will be selected first each time the ignition switch is placed in the on position.
Push or turn the Drive Mode Selector switch until "STANDARD" or "AUTO" appears in the vehicle information display.

SPORT MODE
� Adjusts the engine points for a higher response.
� The setting of the steering system is adjusted to moderately increase steering wheel effort for a sporty feel.
NOTE:
In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be reduced.
Push or turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to the SPORT position. "SPORT" appears in the vehicle information display.
SNOW MODE
This mode makes it easier to start and run from snowy roads and frozen roads.
CAUTION
Never drive on dry, hard surface roads in the SNOW mode, as this will overload the powertrain and may cause a serious malfunction. Additionally, this will cause a premature tire wear and reduced fuel economy.

Starting and driving 5-29

When the SNOW mode is selected, small vibration in cornering may occur. This is not a malfunction.
Push or turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to the SNOW position. "SNOW" appears in the vehicle information display.
TOW MODE
Using the tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load.
The Idling Stop System is disabled when the vehicle is in TOW mode.
Push or turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to the TOW position. "TOW" appears in the vehicle information display.
MUD/RUT MODE (4WD models only)
This mode allows for easier driving or starting on a bumpy road surface such as an uneven dirt road or a steep uphill slope or through sand.

CAUTION
Never drive on dry, hard surface roads in the MUD/RUT mode, as this will overload the powertrain and may cause a serious malfunction. Additionally, this will cause premature tire wear and reduced fuel economy.
NOTE:
When the MUD/RUT mode is selected, small tight-corner braking phenomenon or small vibration in cornering may occur. This is not a malfunction
Turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to the MUD/RUT position. "MUD/RUT" appears in the vehicle information display.
SAND MODE (4WD models only)
This mode allows for easier driving or starting on a bumpy road surface such as an uneven dirt road or a steep uphill slope or through sand.

CAUTION
Never drive on dry, hard surface roads in the SAND mode, as this will overload the powertrain and may cause a serious malfunction. Additionally, this will cause premature tire wear and reduced fuel economy.
NOTE:
When the SAND mode is selected, small tight-corner braking phenomenon or small vibration in cornering may occur. This is not a malfunction
Turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to the SAND position. "SAND" appears in the vehicle information display.
ECO MODE
Assists the driver's ECO-driving. The engine points are adjusted for improved fuel economy, providing such driving features as smooth starting or constant cruising.
NOTE:
Selecting this ECO mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many driving factors influence its effectiveness.

5-30 Starting and driving

Operation
Select the ECO mode using the Drive Mode Selector. The ECO indicator illuminates.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed within the range of economy drive, the ECO drive indicator illuminates in green. When the accelerator pedal is depressed above the range of economy drive, the ECO drive indicator turns off.
The ECO drive indicator will not illuminate in the following cases:
� When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
� When the vehicle speed is below 2 mph (3.2 km/h) or over 90 mph (144 km/h).
� When the Cruise Control (if so equipped) or Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if so equipped) is operated.

ECO Customize
The "ECO Customize" is a function that can change the priority from the Cruise Control (if so equipped) or Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) to fuel efficiency improvements. It can be set when the ECO mode is selected. To activate or deactivate this function, see "ECO Mode Setting" (P. 2-28) or (P. 2-52).
� Cruise Control
When the setting is ON, the fuel efficiency while cruising will be improved by lowering acceleration target from normal (setting OFF) mode.
NOTE:
When the vehicle speed is reduced (for example, when the vehicle is driven on an uphill road from a flat road), it will take more time to return to the previously set speed than normal mode.

Tire Pres ECO advice
The "Tire Pres ECO advice" is a function to show ECO advice information in the vehicle information display when low tire pressure is detected. To activate or deactivate this function, see "ECO Mode Setting" (P. 2-28) or (P. 2-52).
When the setting is on, the ECO Drive Report display shows "See Tire Pressures". You can switch the display to the Tire Pressures display by selecting it in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-31

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (if so equipped)

vehicle information display, and optionally in the main central area of the display screen.

LSD4143
The TSR system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed limit. The system captures the road sign information with the multi-
sensing front camera unit OA located on
the windshield in front of the inside rearview mirror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, the speed limit displayed is based on a combination of navigation system data and live camera recognition. TSR information is always displayed at the top of the

WARNING
The TSR system is only intended to be a support device to help provide the driver with information. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.

LSD4255
SYSTEM OPERATION
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system displays the following types of road signs:
CAUTION
� The TSR system is intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road signs.

5-32 Starting and driving

LSD4307
� The TSR system may not function properly under the following conditions:
� When the road sign is not clearly visible, for example, due to damage or weather conditions.
� When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the multi-sensing camera unit.
� When the headlights are not bright, for example, due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

� When strong light enters the camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
� When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
� If there are deviations in relation to the navigation, for example due to changes in the road routing.
� When overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers.

LSD4256
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Starting and driving 5-33

LSD4257
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the TSR system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Speed Limit Sign" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104�F [40�C]) and then started, the TSR system may be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR system will resume operating automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the TSR system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically and the system "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the TSR "Malfunction" message appears, pull off the road at a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the TSR "Malfunction" message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The TSR system uses the same multisensing front camera unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, located in front of the interior rearview mirror. For additional information, see "System maintenance" (P. 5-41).

5-34 Starting and driving

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

LSD4143
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
� This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera
unit OA located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, see "LDW system operation" (P. 5-36).

Starting and driving 5-35

The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION 5-36 Starting and driving

LSD4308

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4309

Starting and driving 5-37

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Lane Assist" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Warning" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM
5-38 Starting and driving

LSD4260

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4259

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
� The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
� Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
� During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
� When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
� When driving on winding or uneven roads.
� When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
� When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
� When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

Starting and driving 5-39

� When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
� When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
� When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
� The system may not function properly under the following conditions:
� On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
� On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
� On roads where there are sharp curves.
� On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
5-40 Starting and driving

� On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
� When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
� When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
� When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
� When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
� When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
� When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104�F [40�C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display: "Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature."
When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically.
The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions:
� When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
� When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically and "Not Available System Malfunction" will appear in the vehicle information display. If "Not Available System Malfunction" appears in the vehicle information display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the shift position in the P (Park) position and the ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine/motor. If "Not Available System Malfunction" continues to appear in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3484
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit O1 for the LDW sys-
tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
� Always keep the windshield clean.
� Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

Starting and driving 5-41

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (I-LI) (if so equipped)

LSD4143
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or death. � The I-LI system will not steer the ve-
hicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

� The I-LI system is primarily intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers in certain road, weather, or driving conditions.
The I-LI system must be turned on with the ProPILOT Assist switch on the steering wheel, every time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
The I-LI system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The I-LI system warns the driver when the vehicle has left the center of the traveling lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. The system helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time).

The I-LI system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit
OA located above the inside mirror.

5-42 Starting and driving

1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
indicator
2 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi-
cator (if so equipped)
3 ProPILOT Assist switch

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION

LSD4310

Starting and driving 5-43

The I-LI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.
To turn on the I-LI system, push the ProPILOT Assist switch on the steering wheel after starting the engine/motor. The I-LI indicator on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch again to turn off the I-LI system. The I-LI indicator will turn off.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-44 Starting and driving

LSD4311

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I-LI system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Lane Assist" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Intervention" and press the OK button.

4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

Turning on the ProPILOT Assist system will turn on the I-LI and I-BSI (if so equipped) systems at the same time. If the I-LI system is disabled in the settings menu, the I-LI will automatically be turned on when the Steering Assist system is active. For additional information, see "ProPILOT Assist" (P. 5-86).

LSD4260

Starting and driving 5-45

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-46 Starting and driving

LSD4259

I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or death.
� The I-LI system may activate if you change lanes without first activating your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an existing lane marker. If this occurs you may need to apply corrective steering to complete your lane change.
� Because the I-LI may not activate under the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to apply corrective steering.
� When the I-LI system is operating, avoid excessive or sudden steering maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle.

� The I-LI system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
� Do not use the I-LI system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
� During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
� When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
� When driving on winding or uneven roads.
� When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
� When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
� When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
� When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
� When the vehicle is equipped with nonoriginal brake parts or suspension parts.

� When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
� On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
� On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
� On roads where there are sharp curves.
� On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The I-LI system could detect these items as lane markers.)
� On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
� When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
� When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.

� When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
� When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
� When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
� When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
While the I-LI system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the I-LI system is operating properly.

Starting and driving 5-47

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
The warning and assist functions of the I-LI system are not designed to work under the following conditions: � When you operate the lane change signal
and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The I-LI system will be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) � When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the I-LI system is not designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional): � When the brake pedal is depressed. � When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes. � When the vehicle is accelerated during I-LI system operation.
5-48 Starting and driving

� When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs.
� When the hazard warning flashers are operated.
� When driving on a curve at high speed.
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the I-LI system application of the brakes will resume.
Condition C:
If the following messages appear in the vehicle information display, the I-LI system will be turned off automatically.
� "Not Available Poor Road Conditions"
When the VDC system (except Traction Control System [TCS] function) or ABS operates.
� "Currently not available": � When the VDC system is turned off. � When the SNOW mode, or the MUD/ RUT mode or SAND mode (4WD models only) is selected.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel again to turn the I-LI system back on.

Temporary disabled status at high temperature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104�F [40�C]) and then the I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear on the vehicle information display: "Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature."
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The LDW indicator (orange) and the "Not Available System Malfunction" warning message will display. If the LDW indicator (orange) and the warning message appear in the display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indicator (orange) and warning message continue to appear, have the I-LI system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

LSD3484
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit O1 for the I-LI system
is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the I-LI system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
� Always keep the windshield clean.
� Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.
� The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
� Do not use the BSW system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

Starting and driving 5-49

LSD4157
The BSW system uses radar sensors O1
installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-50 Starting and driving

1 Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2 BSW Indicator

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

LSD4298

Starting and driving 5-51

The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicles leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-52 Starting and driving

LSD4299

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Blind Spot Assist" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Warning" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:
� When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM

LSD4263

Starting and driving 5-53

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-54 Starting and driving

LSD4262

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
� The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
� Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
� Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
� Oncoming vehicles.
� Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
� A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
� A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
� A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.

� A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
� When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
� The radar sensors' detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
� The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
� The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
� Severe weather
� Road spray
� Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle

� Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
� Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 � Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing

Starting and driving 5-55

Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
NOTE:
� The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

� If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2300
Illustration 2 � Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
� The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

5-56 Starting and driving

� The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
� If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302
Illustration 3 � Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.

LSD2303
Illustration 4 � Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
� When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

Starting and driving 5-57

� The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD2305
Illustration 5 � Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

LSD2308
Illustration 6 � Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
� If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-58 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors. NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and I-BSI systems (if so equipped) will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
LSD4264
Starting and driving 5-59

Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and I-BSI systems (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-60 Starting and driving

LSD4265

LSD4157
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors O1 for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you consult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: LTQRN5TR
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with the RSS of the Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

For Canada
Model: RN5TR
IC: 3659A-RN5TR
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-61

INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION (I-BSI) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-BSI system could result in serious injury or death.
� The I-BSI system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the I-BSI system.
� There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Not every moving object or vehicle will be detected. Using the I-BSI system under some road, ground, lane marker, traffic or weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.
The I-BSI system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

LSD4340
The I-BSI system uses radar sensors O1
installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane. In addition to the radar sensors, the I-BSI system
uses a camera O2 installed behind the
windshield to monitor the lane markers of your traveling lane.

SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated.
The detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10ft (3.0m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-62 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
I-BSI SYSTEM OPERATION

LSD4300

1 Side indicator light
2 BSW indicator
3 Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)
indicator
4 ProPILOT Assist switch
The I-BSI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light (1) illuminates.
If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone. The brightness of the side indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
If the I-BSI system is ON and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. The I-BSI system activates by controlling the steering input of the vehicle for a short period of time to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane. The I-BSI system operates regardless of turn signal usage.
Starting and driving 5-63

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-64 Starting and driving

NOTE: � I-BSI warning and system application
will only be activated if the side indicator light is already illuminated when your vehicle approaches a lane marker. If another vehicle comes into the detection zone after your vehicle has crossed a lane marker, no I-BSI warning or system application will be activated. For additional information, see "I-BSI driving situations" (P. 5-68). � The I-BSI system is typically activated prior to the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system when your vehicle is approaching a lane marker.
To turn on the I-BSI system, push the ProPILOT Assist switch on the steering wheel after starting the engine. The I-BSI indicator will illuminate. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch again to turn off the I-BSI system. The I-BSI indicator will turn off.
LSD4301

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I-BSI system:

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Blind Spot Assist" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Intervention" and use the OK button to turn the system on or off.

4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BSI SYSTEM

LSD4263

Starting and driving 5-65

NOTE:
Turning on the ProPILOT Assist system will turn on the I-BSI and I-LI system at the same time. For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42). Turning the BSW system off will deactivate the I-BSI system at the same time.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-66 Starting and driving

LSD4262

I-BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-BSI system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� The I-BSI system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
� The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate I-BSI when certain objects are present such as:
� Pedestrians, bicycles, or animals.
� Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
� Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop. For additional information, see "BSI driving situations" (P. 5-68).
� Oncoming vehicles.
� A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
� A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.

� A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
� A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
� The radar sensors' detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
� The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
� The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
� Severe weather
� Road spray
� Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle

� Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
� The camera may not detect lane markers in the following situations and the I-BSI system may not operate properly.
� On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
� On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
� On roads where there are sharp curves.
� On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs.
� On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

Starting and driving 5-67

� When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane markers.
� When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
� When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of a lane camera unit.
� When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is not adjusted properly.
� When strong light enters a lane camera unit. (For example: light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
� When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example: when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
� Do not use the I-BSI system under the following conditions because the system may not function properly.
� During bad weather (for example: rain, fog, snow, etc.).
� When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow, etc.

� When driving on winding or uneven roads.
� When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
� When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
� When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
� When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (e.g., tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
� When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
� When towing a trailer or other vehicle.
� Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

I-BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing

5-68 Starting and driving

LSD2299
Illustration 1 � Approaching from behind
Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

LSD2300
Illustration 2 � Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal then the system chimes a sound (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

LSD3775
Illustration 3 � Approaching from behind
Illustration 3: If the I-BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. Then the I-BSI system activates to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.

Starting and driving 5-69

NOTE:
� The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.
� If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302
Illustration 4� Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.

LSD2303
Illustration 5� Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 5: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

5-70 Starting and driving

NOTE:
� When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
� The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

LSD2072
Illustration 6� Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 6: If the I-BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. The I-BSI system activates to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.

LSD2305
Illustration 7� Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 7: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side. NOTE: The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.
Starting and driving 5-71

LSD2308
Illustration 8� Entering from the side Illustration 8: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the side indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice.
NOTE:
If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when another vehicle is detected.

SSD1094
Illustration 9� Entering from the side
Illustration 9: If the I-BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches the lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. The I-BSI system activates to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.

LSD2051
Illustration 10: � Entering from the side
Illustration 10: The I-BSI system will not operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker when another vehicle enters the detection zone. In this case only the BSW system operates.

5-72 Starting and driving

NOTE:
� The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.
� I-BSI will not operate or will stop operating and only a warning chime will sound under the following conditions: � When the brake pedal is depressed. � When the vehicle is accelerated during I-BSI system operation. � When steering quickly. � When the ICC, I-FCW or AEB with Pedestrian Detection warnings sound. � When the hazard warning flashers are operated. � When driving on a curve at a high speed. � When the BSW system is turned off.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Under the following conditions, a chime will sound, the following message will appear in the vehicle information display and the I-BSI system will be turned off automatically. The I-BSI system will not be available until the conditions no longer exist.

� "Not available Poor Road Conditions" � When the VDC system (except TCS function) or ABS operates.
� "Currently not available" � When the VDC system is turned off. � When the SNOW mode, or the MUD/ RUT mode or SAND mode (4WD models only) is selected
� "Unavailable High Cabin Temperature":
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104�F (40�C)).
� "Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction":
When side radar blockage is detected.
Turn off the I-BSI system and turn it on again when the above conditions no longer exist.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the I-BSI system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, and the "Not available System Malfunction" warning message with the BSW indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the "Not available System Malfunction" warning message with the BSW indicator (orange) continues to be displayed, have the I-BSI system checked. It is recommended you visit a certified NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-73

LSD4340
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors O1 for the I-BSI sys-
tem are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the radar sensors.
5-74 Starting and driving

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors.
It is recommended you visit a certified NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
The lane camera unit O2 for I-BSI system is
located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of I-BSI and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
� Always keep the windshield clean.
� Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.
� Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
� Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. It is recommended that you contact a certified NISSAN dealer if the camera unit is damaged due to an accident.

Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: LTQRN5TR
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with the RSS of the Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.
� The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.
� Do no use the RCTA system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

Starting and driving 5-75

1 Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
5-76 Starting and driving

LSD4313

LSD2216

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4314

Starting and driving 5-77

LSD4157
The RCTA system uses radar sensors O1
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors O1 can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

5-78 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM

LSD4266

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Rear Cross Traffic Alert" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:
� When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4267

Starting and driving 5-79

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS 5-80 Starting and driving

LSD3195
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

� Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
� Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
� A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)
� A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
� The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
� Illustration OA : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
� Illustration OB : When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
� Illustration OC : When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
� Illustration OD : When an ap-
proaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.

� Illustration OE : When the angle
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small
� The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
� Severe weather
� Road spray
� Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
� Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles
� Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

NOTE:

Illustration 1

LSD2043

In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 2

LSD2044

Starting and driving 5-81

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
5-82 Starting and driving

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by conditions such as ice, snow, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and I-BSI systems (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
LSD4268

Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and I-BSI systems (if so equipped) will also stop working.
Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4269

Starting and driving 5-83

5-84 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL
1. RES+ switch
2. SET- switch
3. CANCEL switch
4. ON/OFF switch

LSD4169

� If the cruise control system malfunctions,

it cancels automatically. The

indica-

tor illuminates in the vehicle information

display then blinks to warn the driver. For

additional information, see "Vehicle infor-

mation display � 7 inch (18 cm) Type A"

(P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display �

12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

� If the

indicator blinks, push the

cruise control ON/OFF switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

� The

indicator may blink when the

cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed

ON while pushing the RES+, SET-, or CAN-

CEL switch. To properly set the cruise

control system, use the following

procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: � When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed. � In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed. � On winding or hilly roads.

� On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
� In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the cruise control ON/OFF switch on. The indicator (white) in the vehicle information display will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the SET-

switch and release it. The

indicator

(green) in the vehicle information display

will illuminate. Take your foot off the accel-

erator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set

speed.

� To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

Starting and driving 5-85

PROPILOT ASSIST (if so equipped)

� The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:

� Push the CANCEL switch; the

indica-

tor (green) in the vehicle information dis-

play goes out.

� Tap the brake pedal; the (green) goes out.

indicator

� Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off. The

indicator in the vehicle infor-

mation display go out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed and the

indicator (green) in the

vehicle information display goes out if:

� You depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES+ or SET- switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

� The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

� You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
� Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
� Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
� Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
� Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
� Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.
� Push and release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ProPILOT Assist system could result in serious injury or death.
� ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.
� The ProPILOT Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving. ProPILOT Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. The ProPILOT Assist system is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

5-86 Starting and driving

� There are limitations to the ProPILOT Assist system capability. The ProPILOT Assist system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
� The ProPILOT Assist system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device.
� The ProPILOT Assist system is for highway use only and is not intended for city driving. Failure to apply the brakes or steer the vehicle when necessary may result in a serious accident.
� Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
� Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely.
� Never unfasten your safety belt when using ProPILOT Assist. Doing so automatically cancels the ProPILOT Assist system.

� The ProPILOT Assist system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles.
� Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ProPILOT Assist system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ProPILOT Assist system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ProPILOT Assist system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD4315
The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi-
sensing front camera OA installed behind the
windshield and a radar sensor located on the
front of the vehicle OB to measure the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane and to monitor the lane markers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system will also help keep the vehicle centered in the traveling lane when clear lane markings are detected.
Starting and driving 5-87

LSD4203

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display

PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM OPERATION

1 Steering-wheel-mounted control (left) 2 Vehicle information display

5-88 Starting and driving

3 Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)
4 ProPILOT Assist switch
The ProPILOT Assist system has the following two functions:
1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:
� Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed
NOTE: Steering Assist is not available in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
� Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). When the vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your vehicle gradually decelerates to a standstill. When the vehicle is stopped, the ICC system maintains braking force to keep your vehicle stopped.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4204

NOTE: When your vehicle is stopped for less than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically.
� When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.
� When no vehicle is detected ahead within the driver selected distance, the vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The speed must be above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this function.
� For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link and only when on a limited access freeway (as identified in the navigation map data): � The time the vehicle can remain stopped and automatically restart is extended from 3 seconds to 30 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-89

� If a vehicle ahead cuts in or out of the lane ahead, the vehicle may not automatically start when the traffic ahead begins to move. You need to push up the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal to follow the vehicle directly ahead when it is safe to do so.
NOTE: Even if the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection setting is turned off by the driver using the "Settings" menu in the vehicle information display, AEB with Pedestrian Detection will be automatically turned on when ICC is used.
2. Steering Assist
The Steering Assist function controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle within the traveling lane.
When there is no vehicle ahead, Steering Assist is not available at speeds under 37 mph (60 km/h).

ProPILOT Assist switches

LSD4320

LSD4174
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display

5-90 Starting and driving

LSD4175
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
1 RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
2 SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally
3 CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist system
4 ProPILOT Assist switch:
Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off

5 DISTANCE switch:
� Long � Middle � Short
6 Steering Assist switch:
Turns the Steering Assist function on or off
NOTE:
For ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link equipped vehicles: When Manual mode is selected in the "Spd. Limit Assist" menu, operating the RES+ or SET- switch can apply the indicated speed limit to the vehicle set speed. For additional information, see "Speed Limit Assist -- a feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link" (P. 5-108).

LSD4302
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
The ProPILOT Assist system display and indicators

Starting and driving 5-91

LSD4317
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
1. ProPILOT Assist activation
Displays once the ProPILOT Assist system is activated
2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
Indicates whether the system detects a vehicle in front of you
3. Steering Assist indicator
Indicates the status of the Steering Assist function by the color of the indicator � Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steer-
ing Assist standby
5-92 Starting and driving

� Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active
4. Set distance indicator
Displays the selected distance
5. Lane marker indicator
Indicates whether the system detects lane markers � No lane markers displayed: Steering
Assist is turned off � Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane
markers detected � Lane marker indicator (green): Lane
markers detected, Steering Assist is active � Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected
6. ProPILOT Assist status indicator
Indicates the status of the ProPILOT Assist system by the color of the indicator � ProPILOT Assist status indicator (white):
ProPILOT Assist is on but in standby. � ProPILOT Assist status indicator (blue):
ProPILOT Assist active

7. Steering Assist status indicator/ warning
Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/warning
� No Steering Assist status indicator displayed: Steering Assist is turned off
� Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
� Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active
� Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction
8. Speed control status indicator/set distance indicator/lane marker indicator ( )
Displays the status of speed control by the color of the indicator, and displays the selected distance by the number of horizontal bars shown
� Speed control status indicator (white): ICC standby
� Speed control status indicator (green): ICC (distance control mode) is active
� Green vehicle icon displayed: Vehicle detected ahead

� No vehicle icon shown: No vehicle detected ahead (Your vehicle maintains the driver-selected set speed.)
� Speed control status indicator (orange): Indicates an ICC malfunction

For the lane marker indicator, see "Steering Assist display and indicators" (P. 5-119).

9. Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed

10. Vehicle set speed indicator (if so equipped) ( )

Indicates the vehicle set speed

11. Road information indicator (if so

equipped) ( ,

)

Indicates the information.

detected

road

For additional information, see "Speed Adjust by Route - a feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link" (P. 5-110).

12. Detected speed limit indicator (if so equipped) ( )

Indicates the currently detected speed limit.

For additional information, see "Speed Limit Assist - a feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link" (P. 5-108).

13. Speed Limit Assist indicator (if so

equipped) ( A ,

)

Indicates the Speed Limit Assist activation mode or system operation.

For additional information, see "Speed Limit Assist - a feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link" (P. 5-108).

TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE ON
NOTE:
ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-126).

Starting and driving 5-93

Zone Lane
Blind Spot

Driving Aid
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)

Display Outline Shaded Outline Shaded

LSD4318
Example (all enabled)
OPERATING PROPILOT ASSIST

When the driving aids are enabled:

Zone
Forward

Driving Aid
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)

Display Outline

5-94 Starting and driving

LSD4209
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch OA . This
turns on the ProPILOT Assist system.
� The ProPILOT Assist status indicator
OB illuminates in white.
2. A screen is displayed for a period of time that indicates the status of the driving aid functions.
� When any of the "Warning" systems are enabled, the " " is shown in each zone.
� When any of the "Intervention" systems are enabled, the " " mark is shown in each zone.

LSD4210
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
� When no system is enabled, "OFF" is shown in each zone.

LSD4211

To change the status of the driving aids,

use the O1

or O2

button to

navigate the settings screen. For additional

information, see "How to use the vehicle

information display" (P. 2-22) or (P. 2-45).

LSD4212
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display

Starting and driving 5-95

LSD4303
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
3. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle to the desired speed and push down the
SET- switch OC .
4. The ProPILOT Assist system begins to automatically maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT Assist activation indicator
OD and ProPILOT Assist status indicator OE illuminate (blue). When a vehicle
ahead is traveling at a speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) or below and the SET- switch is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle is 20 mph (32 km/h).

NOTE:
When the I-LI and I-BSI systems are enabled in the settings menu of the vehicle information display, turning the ProPILOT Assist system on will turn on the I-LI and I-BSI systems at the same time. If the I-LI system is disabled in the settings menu, the I-LI system will automatically be turned on when the Steering Assist system is active. For additional information, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P. 5-42) and "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P. 5-62).

5-96 Starting and driving

LSD4234
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display

� When the VDC system is off. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P. 5-177).
� When the VDC system (including the traction control system) is operating
� When a wheel is slipping
� When any door is open
� When the driver's seat belt is not fastened
� When the SNOW mode, or MUD/RUT or SAND modes (4WD models) are selected

LSD4214
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist system cannot be set and the set vehicle
speed indicator O1 blinks for approxi-
mately 2 seconds:
� When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not detected
� When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode
� When the parking brake is applied
� When the brakes are operated by the driver

LSD4319
How to change the set vehicle speed
The set vehicle speed can be adjusted. To change to a faster cruising speed:
� Push up and hold the RES+ switch O1 . The
set vehicle speed increases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h). � Push up, then quickly release, the RES+
switch O1 . Each time you do this, the set
speed increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
Starting and driving 5-97

To change to a slower cruising speed:
� Push down and hold the SET- switch O2 .
The set vehicle speed decreases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
� Push down, then quickly release, the SET-
switch O2 . Each time you do this, the set
speed decreases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).
How to momentarily accelerate or decelerate
� Depress the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required. Release the accelerator pedal to resume the previously set vehicle speed.
� Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required. Control by the ProPILOT Assist system is canceled. Push the RES+ switch to resume the previously set vehicle speed.

WARNING
When the accelerator pedal is depressed and you are approaching the vehicle ahead, the ICC system will neither control the brake nor warn the driver with the chime and display. The driver must manually control the vehicle speed to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so could result in severe personal injury or death.
NOTE:
When you accelerate by depressing the accelerator pedal or decelerate by pushing the SET- switch and the vehicle travels faster than the speed set by the driver, the set speed vehicle indicator will blink.

LSD4216
How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time.
Each time the DISTANCE switch OA is
pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence.

5-98 Starting and driving

Distance Approximate distance at

1. Long 2. Middle 3. Short

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]
200 (60) 150 (45) 90 (30)

� The distance to the vehicle ahead

changes automatically according to the

vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle

speed, the longer the distance.

� The distance setting will remain at the

current setting even if the engine is

restarted.

LSD4321

Starting and driving 5-99

LSD4270

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE STEERING ASSIST

1 Steering-wheel-mounted control (left) 2 Vehicle information display

3 Steering Assist switch

5-100 Starting and driving

Use the following methods to enable or disable the Steering Assist.
Steering Assist switch:
To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push
the Steering Assist switch O3 on the instru-
ment panel.

NOTE:
� When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn the system on or off, the system remembers the setting even if the ignition switch is cycled. The switch must be pushed again to change the setting to on or off.
� The Steering Assist switch changes the status of the "Steering Assist" selection made in the "Settings" screen in the vehicle information display.

Setting in the vehicle information display:

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel O1 until "Settings" displays in the

vehicle information display O2 .

2. Use the scroll dial O1 to select "Driver
Assistance." Then press the OK button
O1 .

3. Use the scroll dial O1 to select "Steering Assist" and then press the OK button O1
to turn the system on or off.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4271

NOTE:
� When the Cruise screen is displayed on the vehicle information display, press the OK button on the steering wheel to call up the "Driving Aids" setting display.
� When enabling/disabling the system through the vehicle information display or when pushing the Steering Assist switch, the system retains the current settings even if the engine is restarted.
How to cancel the ProPILOT Assist system
To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use one of the following methods:
� Push the CANCEL switch.
� Tap the brake pedal (except at a standstill).
� Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system off. The ProPILOT Assist status indicator will go out.
When the ProPILOT Assist system is canceled while the vehicle is stopped, the electronic parking brake is automatically activated.

Starting and driving 5-101

WARNING
To prevent the vehicle from moving or rolling unexpectedly, which could result in serious personal injury or property damage, before exiting the vehicle make sure to push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system off, press the park button to shift to the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off.
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death. � The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is recommended for highway use only and it is not intended for city driving. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
5-102 Starting and driving

� There are limitations to the ICC system capability. The ICC system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
� Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
� The ICC system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles.
� Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
ICC system operation
The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system decel-

erates the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle's total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system sounds a warning chime and blinks the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.
The ICC system cancels and a warning chime sounds if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. For ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link equipped vehicles on a limited access freeway as identified in the navigation map data, the ICC system cancels and a warning chime sounds if your vehicle is at a standstill for more than approximately 3 seconds and a vehicle is not detected ahead.

The ICC system operates as follows:
� When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).
� When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system keeps the vehicle stopped.
� When your vehicle is stopped for less than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically.
� When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.
� When the vehicle traveling ahead moves to a different traveling lane, the ICC system accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system accelerates and maintains the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.
Starting and driving 5-103

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, the system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

LSD4322
System set display with no vehicle detected ahead (7 inch (18 cm) display)
No vehicle detected ahead

LSD4323
System set display with no vehicle detected ahead (12.3 inch (31.2 cm)
display)
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed.

5-104 Starting and driving

LSD4324
System set display with vehicle ahead (7 inch (18 cm) display)
Vehicle detected ahead

LSD4220
System set display with vehicle ahead (12.3 inch (31.2 cm))
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:
� The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.
� When the brake is applied by the system, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When the ICC system detects a vehicle

ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indica-

tor and the speed control status indicator

(distance control mode) illuminates (solid

green

Vehicle ahead stops

When the vehicle ahead decelerates to stop, your vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system automatically applies the brakes to keep the vehicle stopped. When your vehicle is at a standstill, the "(RES+) Press to start" message is displayed on the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

When your vehicle stops for less than 3 seconds, your vehicle will automatically follow the vehicle as it accelerates from a stop.

Starting and driving 5-105

Vehicle ahead accelerates
� When your vehicle is stopped for less than approximately 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically.
� When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than approximately 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push up the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.
� Always check surroundings before restarting the vehicle.
� For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link and only when on a limited access freeway (as identified in the navigation map data): � The time the vehicle can remain stopped and automatically restart is extended from 3 seconds to 30 seconds. � If a vehicle ahead cuts in or out of the lane ahead, the vehicle may not automatically start when the traffic ahead begins to move. You need to push up the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal to follow the vehicle directly ahead when it is safe to do so.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off

and speed control status indicator (main-

tain speed control mode) illuminates

(green outline

The ICC system gradually accelerates to the set speed, but you can depress the accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate. When a vehicle is no longer detected and your vehicle is traveling under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system automatically cancels.

LSD4237
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator OA flashes when the ve-
hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

5-106 Starting and driving

Cut-in detection
If a vehicle moves into your traveling lane near your vehicle, the ICC system may inform the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator.
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:
� The chime sounds.
� The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.
� You judge it necessary to maintain a safe distance.
The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
� When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.

� When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
� When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
� Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.
� The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may flash when the radar sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding, narrow, or hilly roads or when the vehicle is entering or exiting a curve. In these cases, you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

Acceleration when passing
When the ICC system is engaged above 43 mph and following a slower vehicle (below ICC set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the left, the ICC system will automatically start to accelerate the vehicle to help initiate passing on the left and will begin to reduce the distance to vehicle directly ahead. Only the left side turn signal operates this feature. As the driver steers the vehicle and moves into the passing lane, if no vehicle is detected ahead the ICC system will continue to accelerate to the ICC system set speed. If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the vehicle will accelerate up to the following speed of that vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the left lane to pass, the acceleration will stop after a short time and regain the set following distance. Acceleration can be stopped at any point by depressing the brake pedal or the CANCEL switch on the steering wheel.

Starting and driving 5-107

WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of a collision that may result in serious injury or death, please be aware of the following:
� This function is only activated with the left turn signal and will briefly accelerate the vehicle even if a lane change is not initiated. This can include non-passing situations such as left side exits.
� Ensure that when passing another vehicle, the adjacent lane is clear before initiating the pass. Sudden changes in traffic may occur while passing- always manually steer or brake as needed- never solely rely on the system.
Speed Limit Assist - a feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link (if so equipped)
When the ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link is active and it detects a change of the speed limit, the new speed limit is indicated and it can be applied to the vehicle set speed automatically or manually.

The Speed Limit Assist operates:
� When the detected speed limit is 20 mph (30 km/h) and above.
� The "Spd. Limit Assist" is enabled in the settings menu of the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
� While the accelerator pedal is operated with AUTO mode selected, the Speed Limit Assist will function (automatically adjust the vehicle set speed) only when the detected speed limit is faster than the vehicle set speed.
� In the following situations, the Speed Limit Assist will not operate: � When an increase in the posted speed limit is detected, but the vehicle set speed is already faster than the new speed limit. � When a decrease in the posted speed limit is detected, but the vehicle set speed is already lower than the new speed limit.

LSD4326
Example (7 inch [18 cm] display) System display and indicators

5-108 Starting and driving

LSD4325
Example (12.3 inch [31.2 cm] display) 1. Detected speed limit indicator
Displays the currently detected speed limit. For additional information, see "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P. 5-32).
2. Applied speed limit indicator (green frame)
Indicates the detected speed limit can be applied to vehicle set speed.
3. Speed Limit Assist indicator
Indicates the system activation mode or system operation.

" : Manual mode is activated and a

new speed limit (faster speed value) is

indicated.

" : Manual mode is activated and a

new speed limit (lower speed value) is

indicated.

"A" : Auto mode is activated.

Operating the system

When the system detects a different speed limit, the new speed value is indicated. The vehicle set speed can be changed to the indicated speed limit automatically or manually.

When Manual mode is selected on settings menu (factory default setting):

� To accept the newly indicated speed limit, operate the RES+ switch (in case of speed limit up) or SET- switch (in case of speed limit down).

� The Speed Limit Assist indicator (

) will turn off after approximately 10

seconds if the RES+ or SET- switch is not

operated. (The Speed Limit Assist indica-

tor can be turned off immediately by op-

erating the opposite switch from the di-

rection indicated by the Speed Limit

Assist indicator.)

The system will not activate if a speed limit change is not detected.

When Auto mode is selected on the settings menu:
� The indicated speed limit is applied to the vehicle set speed automatically when on a limited access freeway as identified in the navigation map data. Also, if the ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link system is on, but not set (active), and a new speed limit is detected, the vehicle set speed is automatically updated.
� The Auto mode may not be available in some regions or on roads other than limited access freeways. In this case, the system operates as the Manual mode.

NOTE:

Auto mode will not function in Hawaii or US island territories.

How to activate or deactivate the system:

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel until "Settings" appears in the ve-

hicle information display, and press the

OK button

2. Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assistance" and then press the OK button.

Starting and driving 5-109

3. Select "Spd. Limit Assist", and press the OK button to select "Auto" or "Manual" to enable (not activate) the system. To deactivate the system, select "OFF".
NOTE:
The system will retain current settings in the vehicle information display even if the engine is restarted.
Speed Adjust by Route - a feature of ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link (if so equipped)
When the ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link is active on a limited access freeway (as identified in the navigation map data), the Speed Adjust by Route uses road information provided by the navigation system and can adjust the vehicle speed depending on curves, junctions or exits and the driver may need to apply additional braking at any time.
When the vehicle is through the curve or junction, the vehicle will accelerate again to the set speed. When exiting the limited access freeway, the driver will need to apply braking at the end of the exit.

NOTE:
� The system does not operate when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
� The system may not operate depending on the set distance to the vehicle ahead and vehicles detected ahead.

LSD4328
Example (7 inch [18 cm] display) System display and indicators

5-110 Starting and driving

LSD4327
Example (12.3 inch [31.2 cm] display) 1. Road information indicator
Appears when the system adjusts the speed depending on turns or exits.
Curves and junctions
Exits

How to activate or deactivate the system:

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel until "Settings" appears in the ve-

hicle information display, and press the

OK button

2. Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assistance" and then press the OK button.

3. Select "Speed Adjust by Route", and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

The system will retain current settings in the vehicle information display even if the engine is restarted.

ICC system limitations

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death:

� The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.
� The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
� As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
� When the ICC system automatically brings the car to a stop, your vehicle can automatically accelerate if the vehicle is stopped for less than approximately 3 seconds. Be prepared to stop your vehicle if necessary.
Starting and driving 5-111

� Always check surroundings before restarting the vehicle.
� Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.
� The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:
� On roads with heavy, high-speed traffic or sharp curves
� On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
� During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
� When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor
� On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

� On repeated uphill and downhill roads
� When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
� Interference by other radar sources.
� Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
� In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.
The ICC system will not detect the following objects:
� Stationary or slow moving vehicles
� Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
� Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
� Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

The following are some conditions in which the radar sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:
� When the sensor detection is reduced (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)
� Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves
� Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road
� If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area
� A complicated-shaped vehicle such as a car carrier trailer or flatbed truck/trailer is near the vehicle ahead.
� Interference by other radar sources
� When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
� When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automatically check the radar sensor's operation within the limitations of the system.

5-112 Starting and driving

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the ICC system to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the center line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.
The ICC system (with ProPILOT Assist) uses a multi-sensing front camera. The following are some conditions in which the camera may not properly detect a vehicle and detection of a vehicle ahead may be delayed:
� Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)
� The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

� Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera
� A sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or shaded area or lightning flashes)

Starting and driving 5-113

5-114 Starting and driving

SSD0252

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

SSD0253
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.
System Temporarily Unavailable
The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:
� Any door is open.
� The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
� The vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). For ProPILOT Assist with Navi-link equipped vehicles on a limited access freeway as identified in the navigation map data, the ICC system cancels and a warning chime sounds if your vehicle is at a standstill for more than approximately 3 seconds and a vehicle is not detected ahead.
� Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC system for approximately 3 minutes or longer.
� The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode.
� The electronic parking brake is applied.
� The VDC system is turned off.
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection applies harder braking.
� VDC (including the traction control system) operates.

Starting and driving 5-115

� The SNOW mode, or MUD/RUT or SAND mode (4WD models) is selected.
� A wheel slips.
� When the front radar is impaired due to dirt or an other obstruction blocking the radar sensor.
� When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ProPILOT Assist switch. Turn the ProPILOT Assist system back on to use the system.
NOTE: When the ICC system is canceled under the following conditions at a standstill, the electronic parking brake is automatically activated:
� Any door is open.
� The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
� Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC system for approximately 3 minutes or longer.
� The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode.
� The VDC system is turned off.

� When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor.
� When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.
Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the ICC system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display and the system will operate normally. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, press the park button to engage the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-116 Starting and driving

Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may display the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.

LSD4329
ICC system malfunction
If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, and the speed control status warning (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine and set the ICC system again. If it is not possible to set the ICC system or the indicator stays on, it may be a malfunction. Although the normal driving can be continued, the ICC system should

be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the ICC system is temporarily unavailable, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used. For additional information, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P. 5-126).
ICC sensor maintenance
The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: � Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper/emblem clean. � Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor. � Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction. � Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. � Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper.

Starting and driving 5-117

Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror.
To keep the proper operation of the systems and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
� Always keep the windshield clean.
� Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.
� Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
� Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit.
If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

STEERING ASSIST
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Steering Assist could result in serious injury or death.
� The Steering Assist is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving. The Steering Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. It is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
� As there is a performance limit to the Steering Assist's capability, never rely solely on the system. The Steering Assist does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. Always drive safely, pay attention to the operation of the vehicle, and manually control your vehicle appropriately.

� The Steering Assist is intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways with gentle (moderate) curves. To avoid risk of an accident, do not use this system on local or non-highway roads.
� The Steering Assist only steers the vehicle to maintain its position in the center of a lane. The vehicle will not steer to avoid objects in the road in front of the vehicle or to avoid a vehicle moving into your lane.
� It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely.

5-118 Starting and driving

� Always drive carefully and attentively when using the Steering Assist. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the Steering Assist. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the Steering Assist except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
Steering Assist operation
The Steering Assist controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. The Steering Assist is combined with the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional information, see "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)" (P. 5-102).
The Steering Assist can be activated when the following conditions are met:
� The ICC system is activated.
� Lane markers on both sides are clearly detected.
� A vehicle ahead is detected (when the vehicle is driven at speeds under 37 mph [60 km/h]).

� The driver grips the steering wheel.
� The vehicle is driven at the center of the lane.
� The turn signals are not operated.
� The windshield wiper is not operated in the high (HI) speed operation (the Steering Assist function is disabled after the wiper operates for approximately 10 seconds).

LSD4330
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
Steering Assist display and indicators
Starting and driving 5-119

LSD4221
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
1 Steering Assist status indicator/
warning
Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/warning
� Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
� Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active
� Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction

The Steering Assist status indicator illuminates or blinks when Hands Off operation is made.
2 Steering Assist indicator
Indicates the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator � Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering
Assist standby � Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering
Assist active
3 Lane marker indicator
Indicates whether the system detects the lane marker � Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane mark-
ers not detected � Lane marker indicator (green): Lane
markers detected � Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane de-
parture is detected
When the Steering Assist is in operation,
the Steering Assist status indicator O1 , the Steering Assist indicator O2 , and the lane marker indicator O3 on the vehicle infor-
mation display turn green. A chime sounds when the Steering Assist initially activates.

When the Steering Assist deactivates, the
Steering Assist status indicator O1 , the Steering Assist indicator O2 , and the lane marker indicator O3 on the vehicle infor-
mation display turn gray and a chime sounds.
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds the capabilities of the Steering Assist and your vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the I-LI indicator (orange) on the instrument panel flashes to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system automatically applies the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. This action is in addition to any Steering Assist actions.

5-120 Starting and driving

If the steering wheel is not operated or the driver takes his/her hands off the steering
wheel for a period of time, the warning O1
appears in the vehicle information display.
If the driver does not operate the steering wheel after the warning has been displayed, an audible alert sounds and the warning flashes in the vehicle information display, followed by a quick brake application to request the driver to take control of the vehicle again.
If the driver still does not respond, the ProPILOT Assist turns on the hazard flasher and slows the vehicle to a complete stop.
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by steering, braking, accelerating, or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch.

LSD4331

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display

Hands on detection

When the Steering Assist is activated, it

monitors the driver's steering wheel

operation.

WARNING Steering Assist is not a system for hands-free driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely. Failure to do so could cause a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Starting and driving 5-121

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-122 Starting and driving

LSD4223

NOTE:
If the driver lightly touches (instead of firmly grips) the steering wheel, the steering torque sensor may not detect the driver's hand(s) on the wheel and a sequence of warnings may occur. When the driver holds and operates the steering wheel again, the warnings turn off.
Steering Assist limitations
WARNING
� In the following situations, the camera may not detect lane markers correctly or may detect lane markers incorrectly and the Steering Assist may not operate properly:
� When driving on roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers, lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly, nonstandard lane markers, or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
� When driving on roads with discontinued lane markers
� When driving on roads with a widening or narrowing lane width

� When driving on roads where there are multiple lanes or unclear lane markers due to road construction
� When driving on roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams, or lines remaining after road repairs (the Steering Assist could detect these items as lane markers)
� When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates
� Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system may not properly detect lane markers. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
� During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, dust, etc.)
� When rain, snow, sand, etc., is thrown up by the wheels of other vehicles
� When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or another object adheres to the camera unit

� When the lens of the camera unit is foggy
� When strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) shines on the camera
� When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or the headlights are off in tunnels or darkness
� When a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or is under a bridge)
� When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates or where there are temporary lane markers because of road construction
� When there is a lane closure due to road repairs
� When driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road
� When driving on sharp curves or winding roads
� When driving on repeated uphill and downhill roads

� Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system will not operate properly:
� When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, abnormal tire pressure, installation of a spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels)
� When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake or suspension parts
� When an object such as a sticker or cargo obstructs the camera
� When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or luggage area of your vehicle
� When the vehicle load capacity is exceeded
� When towing a trailer or other vehicle
� Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the beep may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-123

� For the ProPILOT Assist system to operate properly, the windshield in front of the camera must be clean. Replace worn wiper blades. The correct size wiper blades must be used to help make sure the windshield is kept clean. Only use Genuine NISSAN wiper blades, or equivalent wiper blades, that are specifically designed for use on your vehicle model and model year. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the correct parts for your vehicle.
Steering Assist temporary standby
Automatic standby due to driving operation:
When the driver activates the turn signal, the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in a standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.)
Automatic standby:
In the following cases, a chime sounds and the Steering Assist is placed in a temporary standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.)
5-124 Starting and driving

� When lane markers on both sides are no longer detected
� When a vehicle ahead is no longer detected under approximately 37 mph (60 km/h)
Steering Assist cancel
Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist cancels, a warning message is displayed and the Steering Assist status indicator and the Steering Assist indicator turn off:
� When unusual lane markers appear in the traveling lane or when the lane marker cannot be correctly detected for some time due to certain conditions (for example, a snow rut, the reflection of light on a rainy day, the presence of several unclear lane markers)
� When the windshield wiper operates in the high (HI) speed operation (the Steering Assist is disabled when the wiper operates for more than approximately 10 seconds)
Action to take:
Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL switch. When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the ICC system on again.

Steering Assist malfunction
When the system malfunctions, it turns off automatically. The Steering Assist status warning illuminates (orange). A chime may sound depending on the situation.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and set the Intelligent Cruise Control system again. If the warning (orange) continues to illuminate, the Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Steering Assist maintenance
The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror.
To keep the proper operation of the system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
� Always keep the windshield clean.
� Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

� Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
� Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit.
If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4�B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licenceexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le pr�sent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autoris�e aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radio�lectrique subi, m�me si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Cet �quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC �tablies pour un environnement non contr�l�.
Cet �quipement doit �tre install� et utilis� avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-125

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE
NOTE:
ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
� In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-tovehicle distance is detected.
� Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
� Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
5-126 Starting and driving

� Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:
� When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
� In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
� On winding or hilly roads
� On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
� In very windy areas
� Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

LSD4224
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches
1 RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
2 CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
3 ProPILOT Assist switch:
Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off
4 SET- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

� Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ProPILOT Assist switch is on
� Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set
� Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the Cruise Control system

LSD4239
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators
The display is located in the vehicle information display.
1. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.
2. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the Cruise Control system depending on a color.

LSD4225
Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the
ProPILOT Assist switch OA for longer than
about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and indicators OB are
displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold the ProPILOT Assist switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set
Starting and driving 5-127

your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off. To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ProPILOT Assist switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.
CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off when not using the ICC system.
5-128 Starting and driving

LSD4226
To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- OC
switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
� To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
� The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
� The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
� There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations.
� Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.

LSD4176
The RAB system detects obstacles behind
the vehicle using the parking sensors O1
located on the rear bumper.
NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB system will continue to operate. For additional information, see "Front and Rear Sonar System" (P. 5-183).

Starting and driving 5-129

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
RAB SYSTEM OPERATION
5-130 Starting and driving

1 RAB system warning light
2 RAB system warning indicator
3 Center display
4 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
LSD4332

NOTE:
� The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system.
� When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

For vehicles with the 12.3inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4333

Starting and driving 5-131

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF
5-132 Starting and driving

Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Rear" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the RAB system is turned off and when the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position, the RAB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD4179

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death. � When the vehicle approaches an ob-
stacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic environment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary. � If it is necessary to override RAB operation, strongly press the accelerator pedal.
LSD4180
Starting and driving 5-133

� Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects:
� Moving objects
� Low objects
� Narrow objects
� Wedge-shaped objects
� Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
� Objects that suddenly appear
� Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc.
� The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles:
� Obstacles located high off the ground
� Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle
� Obstacles, such as spongy materials or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave

� The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions:
� There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached to the sonar sensors.
� A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.
� The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the rear of the vehicle.
� The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:
� There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.
� There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.
� There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.
� The vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.
� There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.
� An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicle's sonar, is near the vehicle.

� Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle.
� The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
� In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently:
� The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
� The vehicle is driven on a steep hill.
� The vehicle's posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump).
� The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
� The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully.
� Snow chains are used.
� Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used.
� The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started.

5-134 Starting and driving

� The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.
� Turn the RAB system off in the following conditions to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation:
� The vehicle is towed.
� The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.
� The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer.
� The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface.
� The vehicle is towing an object (if so equipped).
� Suspension parts other than those designated as Genuine NISSAN parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)
� If the vehicle is using an accessory like a bike rack, or cargo carrier that blocks the sensors.

� Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the RAB system warning light will illuminate, and the "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.

LSD4176
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system:
� Always keep the parking sensors O1
clean.
� If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.

Starting and driving 5-135

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION

� Do not subject the area around the park-
ing sensors O1 to strong impact. Also, do
not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on
the parking sensors O1 and their sur-
rounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane.

LSD4315
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of
the vehicle OB to measure the distance to
the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera installed be-
hind the windshield OA in addition to the
radar sensor.

5-136 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system OFF warning light

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION

LSD4181

Starting and driving 5-137

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-138 Starting and driving

LSD4182

The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 6 � 37 mph (10 � 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.
If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white) and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system applies harder braking automatically.

While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly.
NOTE:
The vehicle's brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences if a collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system function will be delayed or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
� When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision.
� When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
� When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

Starting and driving 5-139

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF
5-140 Starting and driving

LSD4179

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4180

NOTE:
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
� The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.

Starting and driving 5-141

� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following objects: � Pedestrians that are small (for example, children), in a sitting position, operating toys/skateboards, on scooters or in wheelchairs, or not in an upright standing or walking position. � Animals of any size. � Obstacles (for example, cargo or debris) on the roadway or roadside. � Oncoming or crossing vehicles. � Vehicles where the tires are difficult to see or the shape of the rear of the vehicle is unclear or obstructed. � Parked vehicles.
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.
� If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the system will not function when the vehicle approaches the stationary vehicle at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

� Pedestrian detection will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10km/h).
� For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not issue the first warning.
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle or pedestrians ahead in the following conditions: � In poor visibility conditions (such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand storms, smoke, and road spray from other vehicles). � If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other material is covering the radar sensor area or camera area of windshield. � If a strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams) enters the front camera or a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, entering a tunnel or driving in lightning).

� In dark or dimly lit conditions, such as at night or in tunnels, including cases where your vehicle's headlights are off or dim, or the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are off.
� When the direction of the camera is misaligned.
� When driving on a steep downhill slope, on roads with sharp curves, and/or bumpy or dirt roads.
� If there is interference by other radar sources.
� When your vehicle's position or movement is changed quickly or significantly (for example, lane change, turning vehicle, abrupt steering, sudden acceleration or deceleration).
� When your vehicle or the vehicle or pedestrian ahead moves quickly or significantly such that the system cannot detect and react in time (for example, pedestrian moving quickly toward the vehicle at close range, vehicle cutting in, changing lanes, making a turn, steering abruptly, sudden acceleration or deceleration).

5-142 Starting and driving

� When the vehicle or pedestrian is offset from the vehicle's forward path.
� If the speed difference between the two vehicles is small.
� The pedestrian's profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable; for example, due to transporting luggage, pushing a stroller, wearing bulky or very loose-fitting clothing or accessories, or being in a unique posture (such as raising hands).
� There is poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.
� For approximately 15 seconds after starting the engine.
� If the vehicle ahead has a unique or unusual shape, extremely low or high clearance heights, or unusual cargo loading or is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
� When the vehicle or pedestrian is located near a traffic sign, a reflective area (for example, water on road), or is in a shadow.
� When multiple pedestrians are grouped together.

� When the view of the pedestrian is obscured by a vehicle or other object.
� While towing a trailer or other vehicle.
� The system performance may degraded in the following conditions: � The vehicle is driven on a slippery road. � The vehicle is driven on a slope. � Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the cargo area of your vehicle.
� The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
� In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may operate when a pattern, object, shadow or lights are detected that are similar to the outline of vehicles or pedestrians, or if they are the same size and position as a vehicle or motorcycle's tail lights.
� The system may keep operating when the vehicle ahead is turning right or left.
� The system may operate when your vehicle is approaching and passing a vehicle ahead.
� Depending on the road shape (curved road, entrance and exit of the curve, winding road, lane regulation, under construction, etc.), the system may operate temporarily for the oncoming vehicle in front of your vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-143

� oncoming pedestrians � objects on the road (such as trees)
� Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.
� Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may react to: � objects on the roadside (traffic sign, guardrail, pedestrian, vehicle, etc.) � pedestrians when driving on the narrow alleys, etc.
5-144 Starting and driving

LSD4248
� pedestrians who temporarily protrude into or approaching the driving lane to avoid the obstacles on the road shoulder
� objects above road (low bridge, traffic sign, etc.)
� objects on the road surface (railroad track, grate, steel plate, etc.)
� objects in the parking garage (beam, pillar, etc.)
� pedestrians approaching the travelling lane
� vehicles, pedestrians or objects in adjacent lanes or close to the vehicle

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

LSD4183

Condition A:
In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically: � The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source. � The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen. � Strong light is shining from the front. � The cabin temperature is over approxi-
mately 104�F (40�C) in direct sunlight. � The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-145

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-146 Starting and driving

LSD4334

Condition B:
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be canceled, the chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C:
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection brake will not operate. In this case only visible and audible warning operates. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system OFF warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:
When the VDC system is on, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD4329
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-147

LSD4315
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of
the vehicle OB . The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield OA .
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following: � Always keep the sensor areas of the front
bumper and windshield clean. � Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).
5-148 Starting and driving

� Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction.
� Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
� Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability.
� Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
Type approval number:
FCC ID: NF3�FR5CPEC
User Manual statement according to �15.19
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. this device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and

2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
User Manual statement according to �15.21:
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Robert BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
User Manual statement according to �15.105:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

RF Exposure Information according 2.1091/ 2.1093/OET bulletin 65:

Radiofrequency information:

radiation

exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

For Canada

Type approval number:

IC: 3387A-FR5CPEC

Legal warning for RF equipment:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or death.
� The I-FCW system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD4316
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor O1
located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

Starting and driving 5-149

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
5-150 Starting and driving

LSD4186

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4187

Starting and driving 5-151

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.
5-152 Starting and driving

LSD2263

Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.

3. Select "Front" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF

LSD4179

Starting and driving 5-153

NOTE:
� The I-FCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
� The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-154 Starting and driving

LSD4180

LSD2312
Illustration A
I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Starting and driving 5-155

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. � The I-FCW system cannot detect all
vehicles under all conditions.
5-156 Starting and driving

Illustration B
� The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:
� Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway
� Oncoming vehicles
� Crossing vehicles
� (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

LSD2265
� The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions: � Snow or heavy rain � Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor. � Interference by other radar sources. � Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles. � Driving in a tunnel � Towing a trailer

� (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.
� (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.
� (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
� The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
� Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-157

Illustration C
5-158 Starting and driving

LSD2266

Illustration D

LSD2313

Starting and driving 5-159

SSD0253
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

5-160 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system OFF warning light (orange) will flash. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically. Condition B When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
LSD4183
Starting and driving 5-161

Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle information display. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-162 Starting and driving

LSD4334

Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, press the park button to engage the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.

LSD4329
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-163

LSD4316
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor O1 is located on the front of the
vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
� Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.
� Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
� Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

� Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
� Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
Type approval number:
FCC ID: NF3�FR5CPEC
User Manual statement according to �15.19
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

User Manual statement according to �15.21:
Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by Robert BOSCH GmbH may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.
User Manual statement according to �15.105:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

5-164 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA)

RF Exposure Information according 2.1091/ 2.1093/OET bulletin 65:

Radiofrequency information:

radiation

exposure

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

For Canada

Type approval number:

IC: 3387A-FR5CPEC

Legal warning for RF equipment:

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-DA system could result in serious injury or death.
� The I�DA system is only a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.
� The I�DA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver's lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.
� It is the driver's responsibility to: � stay alert, � drive safely, � keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, � be in control of the vehicle at all times, � avoid driving when tired, � avoid distractions (texting, etc.).

The I�DA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.

Starting and driving 5-165

The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to the OFF position and back to the ON position.

LSD4188
For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION

LSD4189
For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message "Take a break?" appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h).
The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.

5-166 Starting and driving

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I�DA system.

1. Press the

button until "Settings" dis-

plays in the vehicle information display.

Use the scroll dial to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then press the OK button.

2. Select "Driver Alertness" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM

LSD4272

Starting and driving 5-167

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display
5-168 Starting and driving

LSD4273

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I�DA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� The I-DA system may not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions:
� Poor road conditions such as an uneven road surface or pot holes.
� Strong side wind. � If you have adopted a sporty driv-
ing style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration.
� Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed.
� The I�DA system will not provide an alert in the following conditions:
� Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph (60 km/h).
� Short lapses of attention. � Instantaneous distractions such
as dropping an object.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

LIC3125
System malfunction
If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.

Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, press the park button to engage the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
� Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
� Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
� Avoid quick starts.
� Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
� Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

Starting and driving 5-169

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application � Avoid rapid starts and stops. � Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible. � Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed � Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops. � Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops. � Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds � Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load. � Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.
5-170 Starting and driving

� Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
� Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.
� Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
� Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
� Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
� Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.
� Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
� Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling
� Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30�60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
� Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
� Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy.
� Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
� Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
� Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible.
� When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

INTELLIGENT 4X4 (I-4X4) (if so equipped)

� Keep your engine tuned up.
� Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
� Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
� Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
� Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" (P. 8-10).

LSD3252
If any malfunction occurs in the I-4X4 system while the engine is running, messages are displayed in the meter.
If the "AWD error" warning appears, there may be a malfunction in the I-4X4 system. Reduce vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

LSD3253
The "AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle" (high temperature) warning appears when the oil temperature of the powertrain parts will increase due to the difference in rotation between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when driving the vehicle on rough roads, through sand or mud, or freeing a stuck vehicle. If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. In these cases, the 4WD changes to 2WD to protect the powertrain parts. Then if the warning turns off, you continue 4WD driving.

Starting and driving 5-171

LSD3254
The "Tire Size Incorrect" warning may be displayed if there is a large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels and tires. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all tire sizes, brand, construction and tread pattern are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn. If you have any problems, please change tires or adjust the correct tire pressure. Do not select the SNOW, MUD/ RUT, or SAND modes with the Drive Mode Selector and do not drive fast.
If any warning message continues to be displayed, have your vehicle checked. It is
5-172 Starting and driving

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
� For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
� Do not attempt to test an 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure that you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

CAUTION
� Do not operate the engine on a free roller when any of the wheels are raised.
� The powertrain may be damaged if you continue driving with the "AWD Error" warning on.
� If the warning message remains on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� If the "AWD Error" warning appears while driving, there may be a malfunction in the 4WD system.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the vehicle is in the P (Park) position, the operation noise may be heard from the lower part of the vehicle. This is not a malfunction.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING
� Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

WSD0050
� Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
� Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

Starting and driving 5-173

POWER STEERING

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Press the park button to shift to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
� HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB OA :
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
� HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB OB :
Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
� HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB OC :
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

WARNING
� If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
� When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal.

Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction.
If the electric power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the electric power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see "Electric Power steering warning light" (P. 2-16).

5-174 Starting and driving

BRAKE SYSTEM

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
� While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
� If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
� The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Starting and driving 5-175

� Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. � When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels. � When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-31). � For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
5-176 Starting and driving

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a "clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
� Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
� Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).
� Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: � Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input) � Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:

� The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.
� You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.
� Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

For additional information, see "Slip indicator light" (P. 2-20) and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light" (P. 2-20).

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

and

indicator lights come on in

the instrument panel. The VDC system au-

tomatically turns off when these indicator

lights are on.

The vehicle information display is used to

turn off the VDC system. The

indicator

light and the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-

tion system warning light illuminate to in-

dicate the VDC and AEB with Pedestrian

Detection systems are off.

When the vehicle information display is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power

Starting and driving 5-177

to a non-slipping drive wheel. The indicator light flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the indicator light will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
� The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

� Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance,

and the

indicator light may flash

or both the

and

indicator

lights may illuminate.

� If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and

both the

and the

indicator

lights may illuminate.

� If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and

indicator lights may

illuminate.

� When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate.

Do not drive on these types of roads.

� When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or both the

and

indi-

cator lights may illuminate. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

� If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate.

� The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

5-178 Starting and driving

HOW TO TURN OFF THE VDC SYSTEM
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON for most driving conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

LSD4274

To turn off the VDC system, perform the following steps in the vehicle information display.

1. Press the

button on the steering

wheel until "Settings" appears and then

press the OK button.

2. Use the scroll dial to select the "VDC Setting" and then press the OK button.

3. Select "System" and press the OK button.

The

indicator light will illuminate.

Turn "VDC Setting" back on in the vehicle information display or restart the engine to turn on the VDC system.

RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP
The system gradually adjusts braking power during normal braking to help provide an enhanced brake feel.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the four wheels depending on the radius of the turn.
WARNING
� The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

Starting and driving 5-179

CHASSIS CONTROL

� Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly. This could adversely af-

fect vehicle handling performance,

and the

indicator light may flash

or both the

and

indicator

lights may illuminate.

� If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-

tem may not operate properly and

both the

and the

indicator

lights may illuminate.

� If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and

indicator lights may

illuminate.

� When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate.

Do not drive on these types of roads.

� When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

indicator light may

flash or both the

and

indi-

cator lights may illuminate. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

� If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not oper-

ate properly and the

indicator

light may flash or both the

and

indicator lights may illuminate.

� The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

The chassis control is an electric control module that includes the following functions:
� Intelligent Trace Control
� Active Ride Control (if so equipped)
INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL (I-TC)
This system senses driving based on the driver's steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.
When the VDC system is turned off, the I-TC is also turned off.
The amount of brake control is changed based on Drive Mode Selector.
When the I-TC is not functioning properly, the master warning light illuminates, and the warning message "Chassis Control System Error" will also appear in the vehicle information display.

5-180 Starting and driving

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

If the chassis control warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the I-TC is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" (P. 2-37).
WARNING
The I-TC may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.
When the I-TC is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the I-TC is operating properly. You may also feel deceleration when the I-TC is operating. However, this is not a malfunction.

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC) (if so equipped)
This system senses upper body motion and controls four wheel brake pressure. This will enhance ride comfort in an effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing over undulated road surfaces. When the VDC system is turned off, the ARC is also turned off.
If the chassis control system error warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the ARC is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
The ARC may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.
When the ARC is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the ARC is operating properly. You may also feel deceleration when the ARC is operating. However, this is not a malfunction.

WARNING
� Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep downhill grades. Always drive carefully and attentively when using the hill descent control system and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
� The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
The hill descent control system helps maintain vehicle speed when driving under 15 mph (25 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill descent control is useful when engine braking alone cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent control applies the

Starting and driving 5-181

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed allowing the driver to concentrate on steering while reducing the burden of brake and accelerator operation. If the hill descent control system ON indicator light is blinking, the hill descent control is engaged; however, the hill descent control will not control the vehicle speed. � Once the system is activated, the indica-
tor light will remain on in the instrument panel. For additional information, see "Hill descent control system ON indicator light" (P. 2-17). If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the hill descent control system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the hill descent control system begins to function again if the hill descent control operating conditions are fulfilled.
5-182 Starting and driving

WARNING
� Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
� The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
� The hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
Hill start assist will operate automatically under the following conditions:
� The shift lever is moved to a forward or reverse gear.
� The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill start assist will stop operating completely.
Hill start assist will not operate when the shift position is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park), or on a flat and level road.

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

LSD4335
The sonar system sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles around the vehicle using the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumpers..
When the sonar system is turned on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the vehicle information display.

WARNING
� The sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.
� The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.
� Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indicator indicates different distances to the object.
� Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
� The sonar system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

� The sonar system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
� The sonar system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

Starting and driving 5-183

CAUTION
� Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.
� Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascias) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

LSD4336
SYSTEM OPERATION
1 Center sonar sensors
2 Corner sonar sensors
The system informs with a visual and audible alert of: � front obstacles when the shift lever is in
the D (Drive) position � front and rear obstacles when the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position

How the system alerts of obstacles:
The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
The intermittent tone will stop after several seconds when the obstacle is identified only with the center sensor. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

5-184 Starting and driving

LSD4337
When the vehicle moves closer to an obstacle, the sonar indicator (detected area) appears in the vehicle information display.

LSD4338
The sonar indicator also appears on the camera view of the center display.

Starting and driving 5-185

LSD4275

For vehicles with the 7 inch (18 cm) display

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

The system is automatically activated

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM when the push button ignition is placed in

the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:

1. Press the

button until "Settings" ap-

pears in the vehicle information display

and then press OK. Use the scroll dial to

select "Driver Assistance." Then press the

OK button.

2. Select "Parking Aids" and press the OK button.
� Select "Auto Show Sonar" and press the OK button to turn on or off the option to automatically display the sonar when activated.
� Select "Front Sonar" (if so equipped) and press the OK button to turn the front sonar sensors only on or off.
� Select "Rear Sonar" and press the OK button to turn the rear sonar sensors only on or off.
� Select "Sonar Distance" to change the sonar system volume to "Long," Medium" or "Short."
� Select "Sonar Volume" to change the sonar system distance to "High," "Medium" or "Low."

5-186 Starting and driving

For vehicles with the 12.3 inch (31.2 cm) display

LSD4276

NOTE:
The system will automatically be turned on when the engine is restarted.
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
� Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
� The sonar system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
� Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

Starting and driving 5-187

� The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground.
� The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects; complex-shaped objects or multiple objects in close.
� The sonar system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
� The sonar system may not operate in the following conditions: � When rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc. adheres to the sonar. � When a loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle. � When the surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the front or rear of the vehicle. � When a sonar or the area around the sensor is extremely hot or cold.
5-188 Starting and driving

� The sonar system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions: � When there is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle. � When there are bumps, protrusions or manhole covers on the road surface. � When the vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain. � When there is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle. � When driving on a steep hill.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD4339
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors OA and OB are located
on the front and rear bumpers. � Always keep the area near the sonar sen-
sors clean.

IDLING STOP SYSTEM

� If the sonar sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.
� The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.
� Do not subject the area around the sonar sensors to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the sonar sensors. If the sonar sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sonar sensors checked by a NISSAN dealer.
� Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint on the sonar sensors and their surrounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.
� When washing the vehicle using a highpressure washer, do not apply direct washer pressure on the sonar sensors. This may cause a malfunction of the sonar sensors.

The Idling Stop System activates to prevent unnecessary fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and noise. � When you stop the vehicle, the engine is
turned off automatically. � When you release the brake pedal to be-
gin moving again, the engine is turned on automatically.
WARNING
The engine restarts if the vehicle moves at approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) or more (on a downhill grade, etc.) while the engine is turned off by the Idling Stop System. Depress the brake pedal immediately to stop the vehicle to prevent an accident.
CAUTION
At the end of the journey the engine must be stopped and ignition switch be pushed off. Lock the vehicle as normal. Pushing the ignition switch off will shut down all electrical systems. Failure to do this may result in a discharged battery.

NOTE:
The Idling Stop System will not activate under the following conditions:
� When the vehicle is in TOW mode.
� When the engine is kept idling without the vehicle being driven after the engine is turned on.
� When the engine coolant temperature is low.
� When the battery capacity is low.
� When the battery temperature is low or extremely high
� When the vehicle is moving.
� When a negative pressure booster decreases.
� When the engine hood is opened with the engine running.
� When the engine is turned on with the engine hood open.
� When the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
� When the driver's door is open.
� When the steering wheel is operated.
� When the Idling Stop System indicator blinks at a low speed.

Starting and driving 5-189

� When the fan speed control is in any position other than "OFF," (0) while the air flow control is in the front defogger position.
� When the front defroster switch is on.
� When the rear window defroster switch is on.
� When the temperature inside the vehicle is lower than approximately 20�C (68�F), unless the Air Conditioning ECO customize option is selected, and the ECO driving mode is on.
� When the temperature inside the vehicle is higher than approximately 30�C (86�F), unless the Air Conditioning ECO customize option is selected, and the ECO driving mode is on. (When the air conditioner is off, the Idling Stop System will operate.)
� When the fan speed of the air conditioner is set to the maximum speed, unless the Air Conditioning ECO customize option is selected, and the ECO driving mode is on.
� When the Idling Stop OFF switch is turned on.
� When the power consumption is large.
� When the vehicle is traveling at altitudes higher than 6,562 ft (2,000 m).

� When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
� When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
� When the brake pedal is not firmly depressed.
� When stopping the vehicle on steep sloping roads.
NOTE:
The engine will not restart even if the brake pedal is released while the Idling Stop System is activated under the following conditions: (The engine may restart by the other engine restart conditions.)
� When the shift position is in the P (Park) position.
NOTE:
It may take some time until the Idling Stop System activates under the following conditions:
� When the battery is discharged. � When the outside temperature is low or
high.
� When the battery is replaced or the battery terminal is disconnected for extended periods and then reconnected.

NOTE:
When the Idling Stop System indicator light illuminates, the engine starts running automatically under at least one of the following conditions:
� The brake pedal is released with the shift lever in the D (Drive) or N (Neutral) position.
� The shift position is placed in the D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position from the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position.
� The driver's seat belt is unfastened, or the driver's door is open.
� The battery voltage becomes low (due to electrical load from other vehicle systems like headlights, heaters, etc., or auxiliary devices connected to the 12 volt socket inside the vehicle).
� The vehicle speed is above about 1 mph (2 km/h).
� When the rear window defroster is operated.
� When the temperature inside the vehicle is lower than approximately 68�F (20�C), unless the Air Conditioning ECO customize option is selected, and the ECO driving mode is on.

5-190 Starting and driving

� When the temperature inside the vehicle is higher than approximately 86�F (30�C), unless the Air Conditioning ECO customize option is selected, and the ECO driving mode is on. (When the air conditioner is off, the Idling Stop System will operate.)
� When the front defroster is turned on.
� When more than 3 minutes have elapsed since the Idling Stop System was active.
� When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
� When the steering wheel is operated. (The steering wheel operation may become heavy, but this is not a malfunction.)
� When the battery capacity is low.
� When the power consumption is high.
� When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position.
� When the Idling Stop OFF switch is pushed.
� When the negative pressure of the brake system is not sufficiently applied by depressing the brake pedal several times.

NOTE:
The following condition will prevent the Idling Stop System from automatically restarting the engine. Starting the engine with the ignition switch operation is then necessary:
� The hood is open.
Use this system while waiting at a stop light, etc. When the vehicle is stopped for long periods of time, turn off the engine.
When the engine is stopped by the Idling Stop System, heating, cooling and dehumidifying functions will be deactivated. To avoid the air conditioning functions from being deactivated, turn off the Idling Stop System by pushing the Idling Stop OFF switch.

RETROGRADE MOVEMENT CONTROL FUNCTION
This system is designed to reduce the retrograde movement that occurs while the driver's foot changes from depressing the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal when moving the vehicle while the Idling Stop System is active on a hilly road.
IDLING STOP SYSTEM DISPLAY
The status of the Idling Stop System can be checked in the vehicle information display.

Starting and driving 5-191

The total fuel saved and the engine stop time can also be checked in the vehicle information display. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display � 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display � 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).

LSD4277
Idling Stop System ON or OFF
If the Idling Stop System is activated or deactivated using the Idling Stop OFF switch, the message is shown.

LSD4278
Fuel saved and engine stop time
The fuel saved and the engine stop time mode shows the following items:
� The fuel saved shows the estimated quantity of fuel that was saved by the Idling Stop System every time the engine is automatically stopped.
� The engine stop time shows the time that the engine has been stopped for by the Idling Stop System.

5-192 Starting and driving

LSD4279
Auto start deactivation
If the engine stops when the Idling Stop System is activated and will not start automatically, the message is shown.

LSD4280
System fault This message is displayed when the Idling Stop System is malfunctioning.
It is recommended that you have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD4207
IDLING STOP OFF SWITCH
The system can be temporarily deactivated by pushing the Idling Stop OFF switch. Pushing the switch again or restarting the engine by using the ignition switch will reactivate the Idling Stop System.
� When the Idling Stop System is deactivated while the engine is running, the engine is prevented from automatically stopping.

Starting and driving 5-193

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

� When the Idling Stop System is deactivated after the engine has been automatically stopped by the Idling Stop System, the engine will immediately restart if suitable conditions are present. The engine will then be prevented from automatically stopping during the same journey.
NOTE:
� The Idling Stop System ON or OFF message is displayed for a few seconds in the vehicle information display when the Idling Stop System OFF switch is pushed. For additional information, see "Idling Stop System ON or OFF" (P. 5-191).
� The Idling Stop System resets to ON every time the ignition switch is switched from the OFF position to the ON position.
� It is best to disable the ISS system when towing a trailer. You can do this by either pushing the Idling Stop OFF switch, or by selecting TOW mode with the Drive Mode Selector.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole, or use the NISSAN Intelligent Key�.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32�F (0�C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see "Engine cooling system" (P. 8-5).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see "Battery" (P. 8-14).
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, see "Changing engine coolant" (P. 8-6).

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, see "Tire chains" (P. 8-37).

5-194 Starting and driving

4-Wheel Drive (4WD) model
If you install snow tires, they must also be the same size, brand, construction and tread patter on all four wheels.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: � A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. � A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. � A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. � Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
� Wet ice (32�F, 0�C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or "grip" under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

� Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.
� Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
� Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
� Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
� Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
� Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20�F (-7�C) or lower.
WARNING
� Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
� Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.
� Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-195

To use the engine block heater: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on. 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.
5-196 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

� Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
� Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
� Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
� If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
� Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, see "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P. 2-12) and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5).

WARNING
� Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
� If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible, If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. � When using a wheel without TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. � Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. � Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
� Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the shift position is placed in the P (Park) position.
� Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
� Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

LCE2142
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

LCE2472
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the liftgate and lift the luggage board in the cargo area using the handle.

LCE2473
2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by lifting up using the handles.

LCE2474
3. Remove the tool kit OA by releasing the Velcro straps OB .

In case of emergency 6-5

NOTE: Fully lower the spare tire below the vehicle before attempting to remove the winch from the spare tire.
9. After removing the spare tire from under the vehicle, be sure to crank the cable up by rotating the winch socket clockwise to stow it.

LCE2475
4. Remove the jack.
� The jack is secured by a fastener OC . To
release the fastener, assemble the jack-
ing rod OD into the wheel nut wrench OE
and rotate counterclockwise to release. � Insert the flat end of the wheel nut
wrench OE into the slot of the fastener OC ,
and rotate counterclockwise to release the jack.
5. The lowering mechanism for the spare tire is located on the passenger side of
the cargo area. Remove the cover OF to
access the lowering mechanism.

LCE2476
6. Attach the spare tire winch socket OG to
the lowering mechanism nut.
7. To lower the spare tire, insert the wheel
nut wrench OE into the jacking rod OD
and insert the T-shaped end of the jack-
ing rod into the winch socket OG and
rotate counterclockwise.
8. Once the spare tire is lowered, release it from the vehicle by guiding the lowering cable and winch through the center of the tire.

6-6 In case of emergency

CAUTION
� Make sure safety cable is coiled above spare tire when reinstalling spare tire/wheel.

LIC5033
� When re-installing the spare tire under the vehicle after use, be sure to secure it with the tire stem facing up away from the ground. See FIG A.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire
WARNING
� Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
� Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.
� Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
� If your vehicle is equipped with Running Boards use the Jack Point located on the front or rear mounting brackets.
� Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
� Never use blocks on or under the jack.

In case of emergency 6-7

� Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
� Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
� Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.
Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.

6-8 In case of emergency

Vehicle shown without running boards

LIC4866

WARNING
� If your vehicle is equipped with Running Boards use the Jack Point located on the front or rear mounting brackets.

� The Jack Point is located directly behind the triangle shaped protrusion near the front and rear of the Running Board stepping surface.

If the vehicle is equipped with NISSAN Running Boards, the jack-up points are indicated on the running board stepping surface and the running board mounting brackets.
The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

LCE2469

Vehicle shown with running boards

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The jack-up points are indicated by the notches under the frame.

In case of emergency 6-9

LCE0087
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown.
4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground.

NOTE:

LCE2043

If the lug nut wrench/jack handle contacts the ground while raising the vehicle, disassemble the lug nut wrench from the jack extension rod, rotate it 90 degrees and reassemble.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.

WCE0056
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD , OE )
until they are tight.

6-10 In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
(OA , OB , OC , OD , OE ). Lower the vehicle
completely.
WARNING
� Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.
� Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
� Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 621 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N�m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and jacking equipment in the vehicle.
6. Close the liftgate.
WARNING
� Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
� The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
� If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
� Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
� Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
� Keep battery out of the reach of children.
� The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-11

� Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
� Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
� Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

LCE2223
2. Apply the parking brake. Push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK or OFF position.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (OA , OB , OC , OD ).

6-12 In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION
� Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (-) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) -- not to the battery.
� Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

CAUTION
Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

WARNING
� Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
� To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
� Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the Low Oil Pressure: See Owner's Manual warning message appears in the vehicle information display), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake.
2. Push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position.
Do not stop the engine.
In case of emergency 6-13

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
� Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
� Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
� When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. Use dollies or flatbed if any of the listed systems are not working.
� Always attach safety chains before towing.

6-14 In case of emergency

For additional information about towing your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle, see "Flat towing for 4�Wheel drive vehicle" (P. 10-31) or "Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle" (P. 10-31).
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models with automatic transmission
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

LIC4863
CAUTION
Never tow 4WD models equipped with an automatic transmission with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
In case of emergency 6-15

NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.

6-16 In case of emergency

Two-Wheel Drive models with automatic transmission
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

LIC4864
CAUTION
� Never tow automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
� When towing automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

� Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).
NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle: � Contact a professional towing ser-
vice to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.

� Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.
� Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
� Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
� Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
� Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
� Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. � Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system or place the Drive Mode Selector in MUD/RUT (4WD models) or SAND (4WD models) mode.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. � Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). � Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

In case of emergency 6-17

� Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
� Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.
6-18 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Cleaning the seat tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can: � After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-
age from acid rain. � After driving on coastal roads. � When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. � When dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

CAUTION
� Do not concentrate water spray directly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area.
� Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

� Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
� Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
� Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
� Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
� Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels: � Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels. � Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature. � Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:
� Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.
� Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/ grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
� Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
� Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION
� Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
� Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammoniabased cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.
� Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
� Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.
� Never use chloride solutions for cleaning aluminum decoratives (if so equipped), damage may occur.

7-4 Appearance and care

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:
� Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.
� Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using the air fresheners.
POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)
The sunshade is made from a tricot material.

CAUTION
To help prevent damaging the moonroof while cleaning:
� Do not rub the material with a cloth. Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread.
� Never use benzine, thinner or any similar chemical to clean the sunshade. This may discolor the moonroof and damage the surface.
� Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.
� Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.

LAI2094
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:
� NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards.
� Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

Appearance and care 7-5

� Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, see "Floor mat installation" (P. 7-6 ).
� Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
� Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
� After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the shift position in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift position in the P (Park) position and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

LAI2003
Positioning hooks The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, see "Seat belt maintenance" (P. 1-31).

7-6 Appearance and care

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS
CAUTION
Periodically clean the seat tracks to prevent reduction of ability to move the seats.
Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet cleansing agent may be used if necessary.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: � The accumulation of moisture-retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. � Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
� Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.
� Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
� Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.
� Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.
Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION
� NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
� Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 NISSAN Intelligent Key� . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
� Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Push the park button to shift to the P (Park) position.
� Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
� If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
� It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
� Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.

� Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
� If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
� Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
� Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.
� Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION
� Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.
� Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
� Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
� Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.
This "Do-it-yourself" section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

8-2 Do-it-yourself

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, see "Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information" (P. 10-37).
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8. Battery 9. Engine oil dipstick 10. Radiator cap 11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
NOTE: Your vehicle may not be equipped with an engine cover.

3.5L 6 Cylinder (VQ35DD engine model)
1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Drive belt location 3. Engine oil filler cap
8-4 Do-it-yourself

4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Air cleaner 6. Fuse box 7. Fuse/Fusible link box

LDI3596

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
� Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-13).
� The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION
� Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
� When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34� F (-37� C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34� F (-37� C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

� The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, see "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
Do-it-yourself 8-5

LDI2860
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level OB , add coolant to the MAX level OA . If the reservoir is empty,
check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
level OA .

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, see "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, see "Engine compartment check locations" (P. 8-4).
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING
� To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
� Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
� Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
� Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

8-6 Do-it-yourself

ENGINE OIL

LDI3014
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

WDI0214
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks OB . This is the
normal operating oil level range. If the oil
level is below the L (Low) mark OA , re-
move the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not
fill oil level above H (High) mark OC .
6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
� Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.
� A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.
Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

O1 Oil filler cap

LDI3357

O2 Oil drain plug

LDI3349

8-8 Do-it-yourself

O3 Oil filter

LDI3350

LDI3598
O4 Right engine protector

O5 Front under cover

LDI3577

Do-it-yourself 8-9

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.

LDI3594
Right engine protector
Removal of engine protectors

LDI3576
Front under cover
1. Remove pins OA and right engine
protector.
2. Remove pins OB and front under cover.
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug and oil filter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

WARNING
� Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
� Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
� Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF)

CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage. � The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque: 15.0 to 21.0 N�m (11 to 15 ft-lb)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque: 29.4 to 39.2 N�m (22 to 29 ft-lb)
9. Refill the engine with the recommended oil through the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information about drain and refill capacity, see "Recommended fluids/ lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2). The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
After the operation
1. Reinstall engine protectors in reverse order of removal.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance reminder. For additional information, see "Vehicle information display 7 inch (18 cm) Type A" (P. 2-22) or "Vehicle information display 12.3 inch (31 cm) Type B" (P. 2-45).
� Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
� Check your local regulations.

When checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
� NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic R ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.
� Do not use CVT fluid or manual transmission fluid in this transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
� Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic R ATF may also damage the transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information Booklet.
The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

BRAKE FLUID

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

LDI2147
WARNING
� Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
� Clean the filler cap before removing. � Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
brake fluid is below the MIN line OB , the
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
brake fluid up to the MAX line OA . For addi-
tional information on brake fluid type, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2583
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the "Low Washer Fluid" warning appears in the vehicle information display.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION
� Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint.
� Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

� Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

BATTERY

Caution symbols for battery

WARNING

No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the

Sparks

battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

Shield eyes

Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.

Keep away from children

Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

Battery acid

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

Note operating instructions

Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

Explosive gas

Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

� If the battery is labeled "do not open" it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery's performance.
� Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
� Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
� If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING
� Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
� When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
� Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
� Keep battery out of the reach of children.
� Do not tip the battery.

NOTE:

LDI3229

Do not try to open the top of the battery.
This battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see "Jump starting" (P. 6-11). If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

DRIVE BELT

LDI3580
CAUTION
� Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
� Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.
The current sensor OA is located near the
battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

LDI2131
3.5L 6 Cylinder (VQ35DD engine model) 1. Crankshaft pulley 2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley 3. Generator pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped OA spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
� Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

AIR CLEANER

LDI3581
WARNING
� Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air, it also stops the flame if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner is not installed and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be cautious working on the engine when the air cleaner is off.

� Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
push the tabs OA and pull the cover
upward.
The dry paper type filter element may be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
NOTE: After installing a new air cleaner, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in
the housing and latch the clips OA .

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, see "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING

LDI3599

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:

1. When the ignition switch is ON or within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch from the ON to OFF position, place the windshield wiper and washer lever into the OFF position.

2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and
washer lever OA upwards twice within
0.5 seconds. This action will cause the wipers to automatically take the service position.

LDI3597
3. Once the wipers are in the service posi-
tion, push the release tab OB . 4. Move the wiper blade OC down the wiper
arm and remove. 5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm until it clicks into place. 6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is
in the groove.
Do-it-yourself 8-19

Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3600
7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and
washer lever to the mist position OD
once and release. This action will cause the wipers to resume the set position.

CAUTION
� After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.
� Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

LDI3189
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
OF . This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin OE .

8-20 Do-it-yourself

BRAKES

FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes selfadjust every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, see appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

LDI2997
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING

LDI3584

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.

8-22 Do-it-yourself

LDI3200
5. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with a new fuse OB .
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

LDI3586
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box diagram. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

LDI3200
3. If the fuse is open OA , replace it with an equivalent good fuse OB .
4. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

8-24 Do-it-yourself

LDI3613

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver OA into the slit OB of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY�

Do-it-yourself 8-25

8-26 Do-it-yourself

LDI2637

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
� Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.
� Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
� Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
OC and OD .
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:
For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada: This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference. (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the LED fog light bulb
If LED fog light bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Headlight assembly*
High Low Park/ Daytime running Turn Side marker Front fog lights (if so equipped)* Door mirror turn signal* Map light* Footwell light (if so equipped)* Personal lights* Step light* Courtesy light* Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* Cargo light* Cargo door light* High-mounted stop light* Rear combination light* Stop/Tail Turn Side marker Backup (reversing) assembly* Tail Backup License plate light*

Wattage (W)
-- -- -- 28/8 -- -- -- -- -- 8 5 -- 5 8 5 --
-- 21 5
-- 16 --

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Bulb No.
-- -- -- 12V28/8W -- -- -- -- -- -- 168 -- -- -- -- --
-- WY21W W5W
-- W16W
--
Do-it-yourself 8-27

5. Fog light (if so equipped) 6. Personal light 7. Cargo light 8. High-mounted stop light 9. Cargo door light 10. License plate light 11. Backup (reversing) assembly 12. Rear combination light

LDI3635
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
1. Headlight assembly 2 Map light 3. Door mirror turn signal 4. Step light
8-28 Do-it-yourself

WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the

system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).
For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P. 2-18), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P. 5-5) and "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the "Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
� Most tires naturally lose air over time.
� Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, see "TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert" (P. 5-8).
Do-it-yourself 8-29

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING � Improperly inflated tires can
fail suddenly and cause an accident.
8-30 Do-it-yourself

� The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.
� Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

� For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

5 Spare tire size.
6 Vehicle load limit: see "Vehicle
loading information" (P. 10-15)

Tire and Loading Information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.
2 Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.
3 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires
to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered

LDI2737
COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.
4 Tire size - see "Tire labeling"
(P. 8-34).

Do-it-yourself 8-31

Checking tire pressure

LDI0393

WARNING
� Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher sustained where it is legal to do so, can cause tires to have excessive heat build up, which may result in a tire failure causing loss of control, crash, injuries or even death. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow vehicle driving at high speeds, make sure tires are rated to support high speed operation, tires are in optimal conditions and pressure is adjusted to correct cold inflation pressure for high speed operation.

� If your vehicle is equipped with 255/50R20 tire sizes, tires require adjustment to the inflation pressure when driving the vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so. See recommended tire inflation chart for correct operating pressure.
� After vehicle high speed operation has ended, readjust the tire pressure to the recommended cold inflation pressure. For additional information, see "Checking tire pressure" (P. 8-32).
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.
8. Check the pressure when driving the vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so.

Size
Front and Rear Original Tire: 255/50R20 Front and Rear Original Tire: 255/60R18 Spare Tire: T165/90D18

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
35 psi, 240 kPa
33 psi, 230 kPa
60 psi, 420 kPa

Recommended tire inflation pressures at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so.

Size
Front and Rear Original Tire: 255/50R20

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
36 psi, 250 kPa

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Example
TIRE LABELING

WDI0394

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

WDI0395

Example
O1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This num-

95H)

ber, known as the aspect ratio,

1. P: The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not

gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

all tires have this information).

4. R: The "R" stands for radial.

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

LDI2786

Example
O2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional).

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department Of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's

look on the other sidewall of the

identification mark.

tire.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

O3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.
O4 Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
O5 Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
8-36 Do-it-yourself

O6 Term of "tubeless" or "tube type"
Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube ("tube type") or not ("tubeless").
O7 The word "radial"
The word "radial" is shown if the tire has radial structure.
O8 Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
� When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.
� Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
� Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.

� Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.
� For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating "M&S" on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE class "S" chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage
Do-it-yourself 8-37

to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N�m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING

8-38 Do-it-yourself

WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
For additional information on tire replacing procedures, see "Flat tire" (P. 6-3).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

� After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
� Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
� Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
� For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark

WDI0259

WARNING
� Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.
� The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
� Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

� Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 10-9).

Do-it-yourself 8-39

WARNING
� The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
� For 2WD models, if your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

� If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 10-9).
� When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
� Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

� The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.
� When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
� Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.
� Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
� Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.
� The use of retread tires is not recommended.
� For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

Four-wheel drive models
CAUTION
� Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, biasbelted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and the drivetrain parts.
� Only use the spare tire specified for your vehicle.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
� For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
� Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
� Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
� Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
� Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
� NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire)
When using a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
� The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
� Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.
� Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
� With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Do-it-yourself 8-41

� When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).
� Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.
� Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
� Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.
� Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION
� Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
� Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance: . . . . . . 9-6 Chassis and body maintenance: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Additional maintenance Items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Oil control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DD engine model) . . . . . . . 9-8

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are fully qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the "Maintenance precautions" (P. 8-2).
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
WARNING
Failure to follow the procedures listed within this section may result in personal injury.
Additional information on the following items with " * " is found in the "Do-ityourself " section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Check that the gas stays or struts properly and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear hatch fully open. If the hood, trunk, or rear hatch is not held open, have the gas stays or struts replaced.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tire pressure sensor: It is recommended that you replace the TPMS tire pressure sensor assembly when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recommended that you have a damaged wind-

shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Transmission P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift position in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for maintenance free batteries): This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, see "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P. 5-4).
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional information, see "Cleaning exterior" (P. 7-2).
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service. In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, see "General maintenance" (P. 9-2). Items marked with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required. When applicable, additional information can be found in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
Maintenance and schedules 9-5

NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE:
Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. For

additional information on the proper mixture for your area, see "Engine cooling system" (P. 8-5).
NOTE:
Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not required. (in-tank type filter)
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.
Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil and transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals.

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
� Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).

� Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
� Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go "rush hour" traffic.
� Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
� Driving in dusty conditions.
� Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.
� Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a car-top carrier.
If your vehicle is mainly operated under the severe conditions, follow the severe use maintenance intervals shown in the maintenance schedule.
OIL CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with oil control system. It calculates engine oil and filter change intervals based on driving conditions. Driving in the following severe conditions will shorten the engine oil and filter change interval.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

How driving conditions affect OCS display timing
3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DD engine model):

Conditions Light
Extreme

Driving Scene
� Freeway driving � City driving (flat/moderate hills) � No towing or heavy loads � No extended engine idling
� Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). � Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining
below freezing. � Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go "rush hour" traffic. � Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-
door delivery use. � Using a car-top carrier. � Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas. � Sustained high speed driving.

CAUTION
� If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
� Operating your vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.
� If your oil replacement indicator resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, please change the oil within six months or 5,000 miles (8,000 km) from your last oil change.

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

Display timing Normal
Early

3.5L 6 CYLINDER (VQ35DD engine model)
The following shows the maintenance schedule.
Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.
NOTE:
For information regarding automatic transmission fluid, see "Additional information" (P. 9-22).

5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/ 12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

Essential:
� Replace brake fluid
(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/ 18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Intelligent Key battery
Essential: � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace automatic transmission fluid
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

20,000 miles/(32,000 km)/ 24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � EVAP vapor lines & fuel lines* � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace brake fluid � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts
Essential: � Replace brake fluid � Replace differential gear oil � Replace transfer fluid
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

25,000 miles/(40,000 km)/ 30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/ 36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace air cleaner filter (1) � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery � Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts
Maintenance and schedules 9-11

Essential:
� Replace brake fluid
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

35,000 miles/(56,000 km)/ 42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

40,000 miles/(64,000 km)/ 48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � EVAP vapor lines & fuel lines* � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace brake fluid � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/ 54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Essential: � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

50,000 miles/(80,000 km)/ 60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

Essential:
� Replace brake fluid
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

55,000 miles/(88,000 km)/ 66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/ 72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � EVAP vapor lines & fuel lines* � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace air cleaner filter (1) � Replace brake fluid � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery � Tire rotation

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts
Essential: � Replace brake fluid � Replace differential gear oil � Replace transfer fluid
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

65,000 miles/(104,000 km)/ 78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

70,000 miles/(112,000 km)/ 84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/ 90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Essential: � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

80,000 miles/(128,000 km)/ 96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � EVAP vapor lines & fuel lines* � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace brake fluid � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

85,000 miles/(136,000 km)/ 102 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/ 108 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace air cleaner filter (1) � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery � Tire rotation

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

Severe use maintenance:
Inspections:
� Brake pads and rotors
� Exhaust system
� Drive shaft boots
� Propeller shaft (4WD models)
� Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts
Essential:
� Replace brake fluid
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

95,000 miles/(152,000 km)/ 114 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

100,000 miles/(160,000 km)/ 120 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � EVAP vapor lines & fuel lines* � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace brake fluid � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/ 126 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Essential: � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery � Replace spark plugs (6)(7) � Replace engine coolant* (3)(4)
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts
(6) Performed based on the number of miles only.
(7) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified replacement mileage.

(3) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months.
(4) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.

Maintenance and schedules 9-19

110,000 miles/(176,000 km)/ 132 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Tire rotation
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

115,000 miles/(184,000 km)/ 138 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not applicable. Proceed to next interval.
Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

120,000 miles/(192,000 km)/ 144 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake lines and cables � Brake pads and rotors � Drive belts* � EVAP vapor lines & fuel lines* � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts � Differential gear oil � Transfer fluid
Essential: � Replace air cleaner filter (1) � Replace brake fluid � Replace engine oil & oil filter (5) � Replace in-cabin microfilter � Replace Intelligent Key battery � Tire rotation

Severe use maintenance:
Inspections: � Brake pads and rotors � Exhaust system � Drive shaft boots � Propeller shaft (4WD models) � Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts
Essential: � Replace brake fluid � Replace differential gear oil � Replace transfer fluid
* Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(5) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

Additional information
NOTE FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID: (1) Replacement interval is 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
9-22 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-12 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Air conditioner specification label . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Securing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Flat towing for 4�Wheel drive vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Event Data Recorders (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Additional data recording (on vehicles equipped with optional ProPILOT Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the "Do-it-yourself" section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Fuel

Engine oil* Drain and refill * For additional information, see "Engine oil" (P. 8-7).

With oil filter change
Without oil filter change

Engine coolant with reservoir

With tow package
without tow package

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF)

Differential gear oil Coupling oil

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

70 L

18-1/2 gal

15-3/8 gal

4.8 L

5-1/8 qt

4-1/4 qt

4.5 L 11.9 L 11.6 L

4-3/4 qt 3-1/8 gal 3-1/8 gal

4 qt 2-5/8 gal 2-1/2 gal

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
� For additional information, see "Fuel recommendation" (P. 10-4).
� Genuine "NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN" (or equivalent) is recommended. � If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" (P. 10-7).
� Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
� Genuine NISSAN Matic R ATF � NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic R ATF ONLY in GE9F01A. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic R ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
� Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super Semi-synthetic API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 75W-90 � The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle repairs.
� LSC Transmission Fluid 12-301

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Transfer fluid Brake fluid Multi-purpose grease Windshield-washer fluid Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil

Capacity (approximate)

Metric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

-- -- 4.2 L

-- -- 1-1/8 gal

-- -- 7/8 gal

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
� Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5 synthetic 75W-90 or equivalent.
� Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 � Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer
� NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
� Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent
� HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) � For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-8).
� Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG (VC100YF) or equivalent � For additional information, see "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" (P. 10-8).

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
� Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
� Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
� Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

� Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
� Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

� U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.
� The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
� If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

� If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.
E�15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
E�85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy "spark knock." ("Spark knock" is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

LTI2051
Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in "Change intervals."

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:
� repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
� driving in dusty conditions
� extensive idling
� towing a trailer
� stop and go commuting

For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG (VC100YF) or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil may cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. Air conditioner system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to ensure proper and safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s) shall be used as replacement parts.
A damaged or leaking air conditioning evaporator shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed A/T in N (Neutral) position Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Spark plug Spark plug gap (Nominal) Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

3.5L 6-cylinder (VQ35DD engine model) Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60� in (mm) 3.780 x 3.189 (96 x 81) cu in (cm 3) 213.45 (3,498) 1�2�3�4�5�6
No adjustment is necessary.
FXE22HR-11 in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheels Alloy Alloy T-type (Alloy spare) Tire size

Offset in (mm) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 0.98 (25)

Spare tire Temporary spare

Size 18 x 8J 20 x 8J 18 x 4T
255/60R18 255/50R20
T165/90D18

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length with front license plate bracket
Overall width Overall height
with antenna Front and Rear Track Wheelbase Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

in (mm) in (mm)

197.6 (5,020.3) 77.8 (1978.2)

in (mm)

70.8 (1,800)

in (mm)

66.9 (1,700)

in (mm)

114.2 (2,900)

lbs. (kg) Refer to the "F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label" on the
lbs. (kg) center pillar between the driver's
lbs. (kg) side front and rear doors.

10-10 Technical and consumer information

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

LTI2050
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
The VIN plate is located as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.
The VIN number is also available through the center display screen. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect� Owner's Manual.

LTI2557
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

LTI2255
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

WTI0172
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

LTI2548
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

LTI2251
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

LTI2549
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

Symbol Name Caution

Reference ISO 7000 0434

Graphic

Air Conditioning System (MAC)

ISO 2575 D01

MAC System Lubricant Type (PAG�POE)

Requires Registered Technician to Service MAC System

Flammable Refrigerant Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
LTI2551
To mount the front license plate, attach the license plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using
the two provided screws OA .

10-14 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
� It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
� Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
� Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
� Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.
� GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
� GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, cargo, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

� GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
� GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
� Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

� Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For additional information, see "Measurement of weights" (P. 10-19).
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo" on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity" on the Tire and Loading Information label.

To get "the combined weight of occupants and cargo", add the weight of all occupants, then add the total cargo weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

Example
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit

LTI2320

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg. or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.)

Technical and consumer information 10-17

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, see "Measurement of weights" (P. 10-19).
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, see "Tire and Loading Information label" (P. 8-31).

LIC4726
Cargo area luggage hooks
SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage/cargo hooks located in the cargo area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
When securing items using luggage hooks located on the upper side finisher do not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single hook.
The cargo hooks that are located closer to the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

WARNING
� Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
� The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
� Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

LOADING TIPS � The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label. � Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
� Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

� Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
� Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle's warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
� Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
� For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.
� When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load/ Specification Chart.

LTI2553
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. For additional information, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-13).
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

WTI0160
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following "Towing Load/ Specification" chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

LTI2554
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./ C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load.
To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the "Towing Load/Specification" chart found in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.

Example:
� Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg).
� Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg).
� Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from "Towing Load/Specification" chart 15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg).
� Maximum Trailer towing capacity from "Towing Load/Specification" chart - 9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg).

7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg) � 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg)
= 900 lbs. (409 kg)

GVWR GVW Available for tongue weight

15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg)

GCWR

� 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg)

GVW

= 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg) Capacity available

for towing

900 lbs. (409 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg) Available capacity = 10 % tongue weight

10-22 Technical and consumer information

The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the "Towing load/specification" chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this manual are for general reference only. The safe towing capacity of your vehicle is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed the published maximum towing capacity or the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage.

Maximum Towing Capacity*2 Maximum Tongue Load Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART With Tow Package*1 6,000 lbs. (2,722 kg) 600 lbs. (272 kg) 10,912 lbs. (4,949 kg)

Without Tow Package 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg) 350 lbs. (158 kg) 8,293 lbs. (3,761 kg)

*1 Vehicles equipped with the towing package include additional powertrain cooling capacity that is specifically designed to handle the higher towing weight.
*2 The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

TOWING SAFETY

WARNING

Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from a NISSAN dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer:
� The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball.
� Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.
� The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16" smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

� The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

10-24 Technical and consumer information

Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.
Weight carrying hitches
A weight carrying or "dead weight" ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver.
Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a "loadleveling" or "equalizing" hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can't carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weightdistributing hitch system.
NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done.
Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 � 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2.
WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake system.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).
Class II hitch
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).
Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).
Class IV hitch
Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Technical and consumer information 10-25

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the "Towing Load/Specification" chart in this section.
CAUTION
� Special hitches which include frame reinforcements are required for towing above 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Suitable Genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport utility vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer.
� The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
WARNING
� Do not use axle-mounted hitches. � Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch.

� To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the receiver when not in use.
� Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Tire pressures � When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
� Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer's specifications.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is

10-26 Technical and consumer information

mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stop light and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/ converter must draw no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle's electrical system. See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are

equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts stores and hitch retailers.
Trailer brakes
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. However, most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.
Several types of braking systems are available.
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brake-sensing module). For additional information, see "Electric trailer brake controller" (P. 10-27).
Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

LTI0117
Jumper Harness
Electric trailer brake controller (if so equipped)
Trailers equipped with electric brakes may require the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller.
To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness, perform the following procedure:
1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the rearmost position.

Technical and consumer information 10-27

Connector Location

LTI2555

LTI2046
Connector
2. Locate the jumper harness connector under the lower portion of the instrument panel. The connector is taped to
the wiring harness O1 as indicated.
� The connector is marked with a white tag with "elec brake conn".
If you have trouble locating the wiring harness, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness.

10-28 Technical and consumer information

WIRE COLOR WHITE
BLACK WHITE RED/BLUE GREEN

NOTE
Vehicle stop lamp switch to trailer brake controller.
Brake controller ground (-).
Trailer brake controller switched output.
Not used
Fused trailer brake controller battery feed (B+).

3. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper harness to the connector.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Pre-towing tips
� Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nosedown condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.
� Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

� Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.
� Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side.
� Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
� Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.
� Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle's behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.
� Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

� Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
� Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
� Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
� Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
� When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so:
CAUTION
If you push the park button to engage the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Push the park button to engage the P (Park) position.
6. Turn off the engine. To drive away: 1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

Technical and consumer information 10-29

� While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides "engine braking" and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
� If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P. 6-13).
� Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.
� Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (805 km).
� For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).
� Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

� When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.
� Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle.
� Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced. For additional information, see "Pre-towing tips" (P. 10-28).

� Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.
� Downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.
� Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
� Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
� NISSAN recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer.
� Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.
� Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

10-30 Technical and consumer information

� When launching a boat, don't allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.
� Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, differential gear oil, transfer fluid and transmission oil/ fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
Tow mode
Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Push or turn the Drive Mode Selector switch to activate tow mode. Push or turn the Drive Mode Selector switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is turned off.
Tow mode disables the Idling Stop System.
Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, differential gear oil, transfer fluid and transmission oil/ fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
FLAT TOWING FOR 4�WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
� Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
� Never flat tow your 4-wheel drive (4WD) vehicle.
� DO NOT tow your 4-wheel drive (4WD) vehicle with any wheels on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
� For emergency towing procedures, see "Towing recommended by NISSAN" (P. 6-15).

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
� Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
� Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
� Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
� DO NOT tow your front wheel drive automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
� For emergency towing procedures, see "Towing recommended by NISSAN" (P. 6-15).

Technical and consumer information 10-31

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Automatic transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
NOTE:
If the battery is completely drained the transmission will not manually shift to other positions.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

10-32 Technical and consumer information

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: � Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty

For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
� Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

Technical and consumer information 10-33

20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm (English speakers) or http://www.tc.gc.ca/ fra/securiteautomobile/menu.htm (French speakers)
Or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Investigations Laboratory 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1
Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada's Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ securiteroutiere (French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

10-34 Technical and consumer information

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

WARNING
A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the "ready condition" for an Inspection/ Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the "ready condition" when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a "not ready" condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition is "not ready". If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready". It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the "ready condition" or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
� How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
� Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
� How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
� How fast the vehicle was traveling.
� Sounds are not recorded.

Technical and consumer information 10-35

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on vehicles equipped with optional ProPILOT Assist)
If your vehicle is equipped with the optional ProPILOT Assist, it will also be equipped with a supplemental vehicle data recording function.
The data recording function is designed to record such data as:
� Driver operational status of accelerator, brakes, steering, etc.
� Detection status of a vehicle ahead and lane markers
� Vehicle information including distance to vehicle ahead and lateral position
� Information on the operation of the ProPILOT Assist and other crash avoidance features
� ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis information
� External images from multi-sensing front camera (Available only when SRS air bag or AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is activated)
ProPILOT Assist does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.

To read this vehicle data, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the recording unit is needed. This vehicle data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.
If downloaded, NISSAN may use the data recorded for the purpose of improving NISSAN's vehicle safety performance.
NISSAN will not disclose/provide the recorded data to a third party except:
� With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee
� In response to an official request from law enforcement, a court order, governmental agency, or other legally enforceable requests
� For use as part of NISSAN's defense of litigation
� For research purposes after the data is modified such that it is no longer tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
If you have any questions regarding the data NISSAN may collect about you, please visit our Privacy Policy: https://www.nissanusa.com.

10-36 Technical and consumer information

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner's Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

Technical and consumer information 10-37

MEMO
10-38 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

2
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . .1-9
A
Active Ride Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-181 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68 Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-16 Air bag warning light, supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-16 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . .4-33 Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Heater and air conditioner controls. .4-33 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-39 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-175 Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-194 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78 Automatic
Automatic power window switch . .2-112 Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-33 Automatic brake hold . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 2-67 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection. . . . . . . . . . . .5-136
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-194, 8-14 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 NISSAN Intelligent Key� . . . . . . . . .8-25
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-16 Belt (See drive belt). . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . .5-49 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57 Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-175

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-27 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-175 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-22, 8-21 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-23 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-177 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-175 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-169 Brightness control Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-13 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
C
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .10-12 Camera Aiding Sonar (parking sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-40 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15 Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . .2-108 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-118 Chassis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-180

Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . .5-180 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . .2-41, 2-66 Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-41 Child restraints . . . . . . .1-32, 1-33, 1-34, 1-36
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44, 1-51, 1-57 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 Climate-controlled seat switches . . . . .2-85 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-194 Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-104 Controls Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-33 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-9 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-85 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-106
D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-82 Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
11-2

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-83 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Driving
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . .5-194 Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Driving the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Dual panel moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . .2-114
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-171 Emergency call (SOS) button . . . . . . . .2-93 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-15, 6-2 Emission control information label . . . .10-12 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-33 Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6 Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-9 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Engine Block Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-195 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-9 Event Data recorders . . . . . . . .10-35, 10-36 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . .5-4 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Extended storage switch. . . . . . . . . .2-100 Eyeglass case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-105
F
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-12 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84

Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68 Front and rear sonar system . . . . . . .5-183 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front-door pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-101 Fuel
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-171 Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-170 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . . .2-118, 2-119, 2-121, 2-122 Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-9 Fuel gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-7 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-104 Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-104

H
Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Head Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . .2-78 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-78 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Heated 2nd row seat switches . . . . . . .2-87 Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86 Heated seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85 Heated steering wheel switch . . . . . . .2-88 Heater
Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-33 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-89 Hill descent control system . . . . . . . .5-181 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . .5-182 HomeLink� Universal Transceiver. . . . . . .2-118, 2-119, 2-121, 2-122 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Hook Luggage hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-109 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85
I
Idling Stop System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-189 Ignition switch
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-13 Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-72, 5-16 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-171 Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key� battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . .3-33 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-83 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-4 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-83 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . .4-10 Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . .5-102 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-165 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-149 Intelligent Key system Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Mechanical key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-13 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) . . . . .5-42 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . .5-180 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-116 ISOFIX child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36

11-3

J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-15
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-25 Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-13 Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key� . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-7 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
L
Labels Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12 Emission control information label . .10-12 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-12 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-81
Lane Departure Warning (LDW). . . . . . .5-35 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-36
11-4

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . .2-82 License plate
Installing the license plate. . . . . . . .10-14 Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-16 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-27 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-13 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-27 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-78 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-78 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-116 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 2-64 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-117 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-117 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Map lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-117 Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-104 Liftgate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Low fuel warning light. . . . . . . . .2-39, 2-63 Low tire pressure warning light. . . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 2-64 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-109 Luggage rack (see roof rack). . . . . . . .2-110
M
Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Malfunction indicator light. . . . . . . . . .2-19 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-117 Memory seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-83 Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-33 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-114, 7-5

Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-26
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key� . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-7 NISSAN Intelligent Key� battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72, 5-16 NissanConnect� Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-7 Checking engine oil level. . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . .2-105 Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-13 Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-37 Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-37

P
Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-23 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-173
Parking brake . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-17, 2-21, 5-23 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-117 Power
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-96, 2-97 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-112 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-174 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-111 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-112 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-96, 2-97 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-174 Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . .8-2 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-44, 1-51, 1-57 Precautions on child restraints . .1-44, 1-51,
1-57 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-20 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 ProPILOT Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-86 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13

R
Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75 Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . .5-129 Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-75 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . .2-38, 2-62, 2-94 Rear power sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . .2-113 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-112 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33 RearView Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35, 10-36 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . .10-8 Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 5-17 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-33 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-110
S
Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . .3-7
11-5

Child seat belts . . . . .1-34, 1-44, 1-51, 1-57 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-33 Seat Memory seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . .1-4 Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .1-6 Second row bench seats. . . . . . . . . .1-9 Seat belt Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-33 Injured person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-20 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Rear center seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 7-6 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-23 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-23, 2-15 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-102 Seats 2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . .1-9 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Armrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-85 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-72, 5-16
11-6

Security systems Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . .2-71
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Service manual order form . . . . . . . .10-37 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6, 2-7 Spotlights (See map light). . . . . . . . . .2-117 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81 Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11, 8-15 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Steering Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-174 Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90 Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-101 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-103 Sun visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-105 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-105 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-114, 7-5 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-81

Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-16 Supplemental front impact air bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-68 Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . .1-81 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-61 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-61 Switch Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78 Automatic power window switch . . .2-112 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . .2-78 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-78 Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . .2-89 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-83 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77 Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-9 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72, 5-16

Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-41 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38 Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . .8-41 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-32 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . .8-29, 10-10 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-41 Towing 2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-16 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-15 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-31 Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Towing load/specification . . . . . . .10-23 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) . . . . . . . .5-32 Transceiver HomeLink� Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-118, 2-119, 2-121, 2-122 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-32 USB/iPod� Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .2-97
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-16 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-177 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . .2-72, 5-16 Vehicle information display . . . . .2-22, 2-45 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-15 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-17 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start. .2-72, 5-16 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

W
Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-16 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-14 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-15 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . .6-2 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-39, 2-63 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-18 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39, 2-64 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-23, 2-15 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-81, 2-16 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . .2-71 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-81 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . .10-10 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . .8-29, 10-10
11-7

When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-111
Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-111 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-112 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-111 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-112 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-73 Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-98
11-8

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
� Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
� Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
� Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
See "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" (P. 10-2).
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver's door. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P. 8-29).
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, see "Break-in schedule" (P. 5-169). Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

To view the digital NissanConnect manual, go to www.nissanquickguide.com/path nder/2022/browse or snap this QR code with an appropriate QR code reader.
Printing : April 2021 Publication No.: OM22EA 0R53U0
Printed in the U.S.A.

R53-D